DX 700 Doosan

DX700LC
Operation and Maintenance Manual

950106-00012E
Serial Number 5001 and Up
June 2010
DOOSAN reserves the right to improve our products in a continuing process to provide the best possible product
to the market place. These improvements can be implemented at any time with no obligation to change materials
on previously sold products. It is recommended that consumers periodically contact their distributors for recent
documentation on purchased equipment.
This documentation may include attachments and optional equipment that is not available in your machine's
package. Please call your distributor for additional items that you may require.
Illustrations used throughout this manual are used only as a representation of the actual piece of equipment, and
may vary from the actual item.
950106-00012E Operation and Maintenance Manual Copyright Doosan 2010

Table of Contents
Safety ..........................................................................................1-1
To the Operator of a DOOSAN Excavator ......................................... 1-1
Location of Safety Labels................................................................... 1-4
Summary of Safety Precautions for Lifting in Digging Mode............ 1-15
Unauthorized Modifications.............................................................. 1-16
General Hazard Information............................................................. 1-16
Before Starting Engine..................................................................... 1-25
Machine Operation........................................................................... 1-28
Maintenance .................................................................................... 1-35
Battery.............................................................................................. 1-44
Towing ............................................................................................. 1-46
Shipping and Transportation............................................................ 1-47
Excavator Rated Lift Capacity Tables.............................................. 1-48
Operating Controls ....................................................................2-1

Component Locations ........................................................................ 2-2
Operator's Area.................................................................................. 2-4
Operational Controls and Panels ....................................................... 2-6
Instrument Panel.............................................................................. 2-20
Multifunction Gauge and Graphic Information ................................. 2-27
Mode Selector Buttons..................................................................... 2-33
Setting Main Menu ........................................................................... 2-35
Flow Control..................................................................................... 2-44
Operation Selection Display............................................................. 2-46
Heater and Air Conditioner Control Panel........................................ 2-49
Stereo .............................................................................................. 2-55
Miscellaneous Electrical Devices..................................................... 2-56
Seat Adjustment............................................................................... 2-58
Table of Contents 950106-00012E

I
Ceiling Cover ................................................................................... 2-62
Front Windows ................................................................................. 2-63
Door Side Latch ............................................................................... 2-65
Cabin Storage Compartments ......................................................... 2-66
Ashtray............................................................................................. 2-66
Sun Visor ......................................................................................... 2-67
Hanger ............................................................................................. 2-67
Cup Holder....................................................................................... 2-68
Door Window Holder........................................................................ 2-68
Emergency Glass Breaking Tool ..................................................... 2-68
Miscellaneous Access Covers and Doors........................................ 2-69
Operation....................................................................................3-1
To Handle a New Excavator .............................................................. 3-1
Starting and Stopping the Engine ...................................................... 3-2
Safety Lever..................................................................................... 3-13
Travel ............................................................................................... 3-14
Operating Instructions...................................................................... 3-19
Operating Precautions ..................................................................... 3-25
Parking Excavator............................................................................ 3-30
Towing Procedure............................................................................ 3-31
Hydraulic Breaker ............................................................................ 3-32
Adjusting the Pump Flow ................................................................. 3-37
Operating Techniques...................................................................... 3-40
Operation Under Unusual Conditions .............................................. 3-42
Inspection, Maintenance and Adjustment...............................4-1

Preventive Maintenance .................................................................... 4-1
Preliminary Work Machine Setup for Maintenance............................ 4-4
Table of Recommended Lubricants ................................................... 4-6
Fluid Capacities ................................................................................. 4-8
Lubrication and Service Chart............................................................ 4-8
Maintenance Intervals...................................................................... 4-12

II
10 Hour / Daily Service .................................................................... 4-14
50 Hour / Weekly Service ................................................................ 4-25
250 Hour / Monthly Service.............................................................. 4-28
500 Hour / 3 Month Service ............................................................. 4-34
1,000 Hour / 6 Month Service .......................................................... 4-43
2,000 Hour / Yearly Service ............................................................. 4-49
4,000 Hour / Biennial Service .......................................................... 4-55
12,000 Hour / 6 Year Service........................................................... 4-56
Air-Conditioning System .................................................................. 4-57
Bolt and Nut Inspection.................................................................... 4-58
Bucket .............................................................................................. 4-71
Bucket Shimming Procedures.......................................................... 4-73
Electrical System ............................................................................. 4-74
Engine Cooling System.................................................................... 4-78
Fuel Transfer Pump (Optional) ........................................................ 4-83
Handling of Accumulator.................................................................. 4-85
Track Tension .................................................................................. 4-86
Venting and Priming Hydraulic System............................................ 4-88
Long Term Storage .......................................................................... 4-90
Maintenance in Special Conditions.................................................. 4-92
Transportation ...........................................................................5-1
Disassembly and Assembly Before and after Transportation ............ 5-1
Loading and Unloading ...................................................................... 5-6
Lifting With Sling .............................................................................. 5-10
Troubleshooting ........................................................................6-1
Electrical System ............................................................................... 6-1
Engine................................................................................................ 6-2
Hydraulic System ............................................................................... 6-3
Swing System .................................................................................... 6-4
Travel System .................................................................................... 6-5

III
Specification ..............................................................................7-1
Approximate Weight of Workload Materials....................................... 7-6
Index ...........................................................................................8-1

IV
OP001120
1Safety
TO THE OPERATOR OF A
DOOSAN EXCAVATOR
DANGER
Unsafe use of the excavator could lead to serious injury or
death. Operating procedures, maintenance and equipment
practices or traveling or shipping methods that do not
follow the safety guidelines on the following pages could
cause serious, potentially fatal injuries or extensive
damage to the machine or nearby property.
Please respect the importance of taking responsibility for your

own safety, and that of other people who may be affected by
your actions.
The safety information on the following pages is organized into
the following sections:
1. “Location of Safety Labels” on page 1-4
2. “Summary of Safety Precautions for Lifting in Digging
Mode” on page 1-15
3. “Unauthorized Modifications” on page 1-16
4. “General Hazard Information” on page 1-16
5. “Before Starting Engine” on page 1-25
6. “Machine Operation” on page 1-28
7. “Maintenance” on page 1-35
8. “Battery” on page 1-44
9. “Towing” on page 1-46
10. “Shipping and Transportation” on page 1-47
11. “Excavator Rated Lift Capacity Tables” on page 1-48
Safety OP001120
1-1
WARNING
Improper operation and maintenance of this machine can
be hazardous and could result in serious injury or death.
Operator and maintenance personnel should read this
manual thoroughly before beginning operation or
maintenance.
Keep this manual in the storage compartment to the rear of
the operator's seat, and have all personnel involved in
working on the machine read the manual periodically.
Some actions involved in operation and maintenance of the
machine can cause a serious accident, if they are not done
in a manner described in this manual.
The procedures and precautions given in this manual apply
only to intended uses of the machine.
If you use your machine for any unintended uses that are
not specifically prohibited, you must be sure that it is safe
for any others. In no event should you or others engage in
prohibited uses or actions as described in this manual.
DOOSAN delivers machines that comply with all applicable
regulations and standards of the country to which it has
been shipped. If this machine has been purchased in
another country or purchased from someone in another
country, it may lack certain safety devices and
specifications that are necessary for use in your country. If
there is any question about whether your product complies
with the applicable standards and regulations of your
country, consult DOOSAN or your DOOSAN distributor
before operating the machine.
SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL

Be Prepared - Get to Know All Operating and Safety
Instructions.
This is the Safety Alert Symbol. Wherever it appears in this
manual or on safety signs on the machine you should be
alert to the potential for personal injury or accidents.
Always observe safety precautions and follow
recommended procedures.
Safety OP001120
1-2
Learn the Signal Words Used with the
Safety Alert Symbol
The words "CAUTION", "Warning", and "DANGER" used
throughout this manual and on decals on the machine indicate
degree of risk of hazards or unsafe practices. All three degrees
of risk indicate that safety is involved. Observe precautions
indicated whenever you see the Safety Alert "Triangle", no
matter which signal word appears next to the "Exclamation
Point" symbol.
CAUTION
This word is used on safety messages and safety labels and
indicates potential of a hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. It may
also be used to alert against a generally unsafe practice.
WARNING
indicates potential of a hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, could result in serious injury or death. It may also
be used to alert against a highly unsafe practice.
DANGER
indicates an imminent hazard of a situation that, if not
avoided, is very likely to cause death or extremely serious
injury. It may also be used to alert against equipment that
may explode or detonate if handled or treated carelessly.
Safety precautions are described in SAFETY from page 1-4 on.

DOOSAN cannot predict every circumstance that might involve
a potential hazard in operation and maintenance. Therefore the
safety messages in this manual and on the machine may not
include all possible safety precautions. If any procedures or
actions not specifically recommended or allowed in this manual
are used, you must be sure that you and others can do such
procedures and actions safely and without damaging the
machine. If you are unsure about the safety of some procedures,
contact a DOOSAN distributor.
Safety OP001120
1-3
LOCATION OF SAFETY LABELS
11
3 5 1 2 6
7
14
15
14
12
13
9 14 19
10
16
18 18 FG016159
Figure 1
Safety OP001120
1-4
There are several specific warning signs on this machine. The
exact location of hazards and the description of the hazards are
reviewed in this section.
Please become familiarized with all warning signs.
Make sure that all of the warning signs are legible. Clean the
warning signs or replace the warning signs if you cannot read the
words. Replace the illustrations if the illustrations are not visible.
When you clean the warning signs, use a cloth, water and soap.
Do not use solvent, gasoline, or other harsh chemicals to clean
the safety signs. Solvents, gasoline, or other harsh chemicals
could loosen the adhesive that secures the warning sign. Loose
adhesive will allow the warning sign to fall off.
Replace any safety sign that is damaged, or missing. If a safety
sign is attached to a part that is replaced, install a safety sign on
the replacement part.
Safety OP001120
1-5
1. Warnings for Operation, Inspection
and Maintenance (190-00688,
190-00092)
AVOID DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. - READ AND UNDERSTAND

OPERATION MANUAL AND SAFETY LABELS prior to operating
this machine.
Never get in under the machine while it is being jacked up

with boom and arm.
Sound the hor n to aler t the people nearby before operating,
and make sure that all persons are clear of area.
Controls may be changed for attachments or operator 190-00092
preference. Tr y control pattern before operating.
190-00688
ARO1080L
2. Warnings for High Voltage (190-00689,

190-00096)
DANGER
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH BY
ELECTROCTION can occur if
machine or attachments are
not a safe distance from electrical
power lines.
Line voltage Safe Distance
6.6 kv At least 3m(10ft)
66.6 kv At least 5m(16ft) 190-00096
275.0 kv At least 10m(33ft)
190-00689
ARO1090L
Safety OP001120
1-6
3. Warnings When Opening a Front
Window (2190-3388, 190-00093)
When raising window,

lock it in place with lock
pins on both sides.
Falling window can cause

injury.
2190-3388
190-00093
FG000665
4. Warnings for a High-pressure Cylinder

(190-00122)
190-00122
ARO1110L
Safety OP001120
1-7
5. Warnings When Adjusting Track
Tension (2190-3386A, 190-00521)
T h e t r a ck a d j u s t e r a d j u s t m e n t a n d h a n d l i n g
The spring in the track adjuster is loaded with great force
and the pressure in the cylinder is very high. For this
reason there is a possibility of an accident which
may involve injury to personnel. It is very dangerous
to make mistakes when performing such an adjustment
or disassembly.
Be sure to read the procedures described in the Operation
and Maintenance Manual carefully before adjusting the
track tension.
2190-3386A
190-00521
ARO1120L
6. Warnings for Leaving Operator's Seat

(190-00693, 190-00094)
Sudden and unwanted machine

movement can cause serious
injury or death.
Always make sure when leaving

operator’s seat to :
Lower equipment to the ground.
Move safety lever to LOCK position.
Turn key switch OFF. Remove key 190-00094
from switch.
190-00693
FG014682
Safety OP001120
1-8
7. Warnings for Batteries Maintenance
(2190-2533A, 190-00100)
Battery fumes can explode. Keep sparks and flames away

from batteries.
Always avoid storing metals like tools or flammable
materials around or on the batteries. Explosion or fire
can be caused by shortcircuiting batteries.
Surfuric acid in battery is poisonous. It is strong enough
burn skin, eat holes in clothing, and cause blindness
if splashed eyes.
If you spill acid on yourself;
1. Flush your skin with water.
2. Apply baking soda or lime to help neutralize the acid.
3. Flush your eyes with water for 10-15 minutes.
Get medical attention immediately.
2190-2533A 190-00100
ARO1150L
8. Warnings for High Temperature

Hydraulic Oil (190-00691A, 190-00097)
HOT OIL CAN CAUSE INJURY OR

BLINDNESS.
To prevent hot oil from spurting out:

Turn engine off
Allow oil to cool
190-00097
Lift cap to relieve pressure
190-00691A
FG012964
Safety OP001120
1-9
9. Warnings for Hot Coolant (190-00692,
190-00097)
HOT COOLANT CAN CAUSE INJURY

OR BLINDNESS.
Never loosen or open radiator cap
when coolant is hot and under
pressure.
To open cap, stop engine, wait until
radiator is cool. Then loosen cap 190-00097
slowly to relieve the pressure.
190-00692
ARO1170L
10. Warnings for Handling an Accumulator

(190-00703, 190-00099)
Keep away from flame.

Do not weld on, or drill
into the accumulator.
EXPLOSION HAZARD
190-00703
190-00099
ARO1180L
Safety OP001120
1-10
11. Warnings for Rotating Parts
(190-00694, 190-00095, 190-00557)
190-00095
Rotating par ts can cause

personal injur y.
Keep away from fan and
belt when engine is run-
ning. Stop engine before
ser vicing.
190-00694 190-00557
ARO1190L
12. Warning Tag - Used When Inspection

and Maintenance (190-00695A,
190-00098A)
WARNING
DO NOT OPERATE
when performing inspection
or maintenance 190-00098A
190-00695A
FG011223
Safety OP001120
1-11
13. Warning for a Hot Surface (190-00648A)
190-00648
ARO1210L
14. Caution for Hood (190-00522A)
190-00522A
FG012965
15. Keep Out of the Swing Area

(2190-3379A, K1008571)
2190-3379A
K1008571
FG006551
Safety OP001120
1-12
16. Warnings for Front Attachments
(190-00652)
190-00652
ARO1230L
17. Warning for Engine ECU (K1012583)
CAUTION
To prevent damage to ECU of engine by
electrical welding to the body structure.
Be sure to read the procedures described
in the Operation and Maintenance manual
carefully before electrical welding.
K1012583
FG014331
Safety OP001120
1-13
18. Warning for Lifting, Tie Down
(K1042074A)
K1042074A
FG014828
19. Warning for Tie Down (950209-00205)
950209-00205
FG014875
Safety OP001120
1-14
SUMMARY OF SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS FOR LIFTING IN
DIGGING MODE
DANGER
Unsafe use of the excavator while making rated lifts could
cause serious, potentially fatal injuries or extensive
damage to the machine or nearby property. Do not let
anyone operate the machine unless they've been properly
trained and understand the information in the Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
To lift safely while in Digging Mode, the following items must be

evaluated by the operator and the work site crew.
• Condition of ground support.
• Excavator configuration and attachments.
• Weight, lifting height and lifting radius.
• Safe rigging of the load.
• Proper handling of the suspended load.
Tag lines on opposite sides of the load can be very helpful in
keeping a suspended load secure, if they are anchored safely to
control points on the ground.
WARNING
NEVER wrap a tag line around your hands or body.
NEVER rely on tag lines or make rated lifts when wind gusts
are more than 48.3 km/h (30 MPH). Be prepared for any type
of wind gust when working with loads that have a large
surface area.
Always engage the "Digging Mode" control on the Instrument

Panel before using the excavator for lifting work.
WARNING
If you need more information or have any questions or
concerns about safe operating procedures or working the
excavator correctly in a particular application or in the
specific conditions of your individual operating environment,
please consult your local DOOSAN representative.
Safety OP001120
1-15
UNAUTHORIZED
MODIFICATIONS
Any modification made without authorization or written approval
from DOOSAN can create a safety hazard, for which the
machine owner must be held responsible.
For safety's sake, replace all OEM parts with the correct
authorized or genuine DOOSAN part. For example, not taking
the time to replace fasteners, bolts or nuts with the correct
replacement parts could lead to a condition in which the safety
of critical assemblies is dangerously compromised.
GENERAL HAZARD
INFORMATION
Safety Rules
Only trained and authorized personnel can operate and maintain
the machine.
Follow all safety rules, precautions and instructions when
operating or performing maintenance on the machine.
Do not operate the machine if you are not feeling well, if you are
taking medication that makes you feel sleepy, if you have been
drinking, or if you are suffering from emotional problems. These
problems will interfere with your sense of judgement in
emergencies and may cause accidents.
When working with another operator or with a person on work
site traffic duty, be sure that all personnel know the nature of the
work and understand all hand signals that are to be used.
Always observe strictly any other rules related to safety.
Safety Features
Be sure that all guards and covers are installed in their proper
position. Have guards and covers repaired immediately if
damaged.
Be sure that you understand the method of use of safety
features such as safety lock lever and the seat belt, and use
them properly.
Never remove any safety features. Always keep them in good
operating condition.
Failure to use safety features according to the instructions in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual could result in serious
bodily injury.
Safety OP001120
1-16
Inside Operator's Compartment
When entering the operator's compartment, always remove all
mud and oil from the soles of your shoes. If you operate the
travel pedal with mud or oil stuck to your shoes, your foot may
slip and this may cause a serious accident.
After using the ashtray, make sure that any matches or
cigarettes are properly extinguished, and be sure to close the
ashtray. If the ashtray is left open, there is danger of fire.
Do not stick suction pads to the window glass. Suction pads act
as a lens and may cause fire.
Do not leave lighters laying around the operator's compartment.
If the temperature inside the operator's compartment becomes
high, there is danger that the lighter may explode.
Do not use cellular telephones inside the operator's
compartment when driving or operating the machine. There
is danger that this may lead to an unexpected accident.
Never bring any dangerous objects such as flammable or
explosive items into the operator's cabin.
To ensure safety, do not use the radio or music headphones
when operating the machine. There is danger that this may lead
to a serious accident.
When operating the machine, do not put your hands or head out
of the window.
When standing up from the operator's seat, always place safety
lock lever securely in the "LOCK" position. If you accidentally
touch the work equipment levers when they are not locked, the
machine may suddenly move and cause serous injury or
damage.
When leaving the machine, lower the work equipment
completely to the ground, set safety lock lever to the "LOCK"
position and shut down engine. Use the key to lock all the
equipment. Always remove the key and take it with you.
Clothing and Personal Protective Items

Contain long hair, and avoid loose clothing and jewelry. They
can catch on controls or in protruding parts and cause serious
injury or death.
Do not wear oily clothes. They are highly flammable.
Full eye protection, a hard hat, safety shoes and gloves may be
required at the work site.
While working on the machine, never use inadequate tools.
They could break or slip, causing injury, or they may not HAOA020L
adequately perform intended functions. Figure 2
Safety OP001120
1-17
Breathing Masks, Ear Protection May Be
Required
Do not forget that some risks to your health may not be
immediately apparent. Exhaust gases and noise pollution may
not be visible, but these hazards can cause disabling or
permanent injuries.
NOTE: The equivalent continuous a weighted sound
pressure level at the workstation for this machine is
73 dB (A).
Measurement is obtained on a dynamic machine
following the procedures and cabin conditions as
described in ISO 6396.
NOTE: The guaranteed sound power level emitted by the
machinery for this machine is 104 dB(A).
Measurement is obtained on a dynamic machine with
the procedures as described in 2000/14/EC.
Vibration Level Information

Hands/Arms: The weighted root mean square acceleration to
which the hands/arms are subjected, is less than 2.5 m/s2.
Whole body: The weighted root mean square acceleration to
which the whole body is subjected, is less than 0.5 m/s2.
Measurements are obtained on a representative machine, using
measuring procedures as described in the following standard:
ISO 2631/1. ISO 5349, and SAE J1166.
Recommendations for Limiting Vibrations

1. Select the right machine, equipment and attachments for a
particular application.
2. Replace any damaged seat by a DOOSAN genuine part.
Keep the seat maintained and adjusted.
• Adjust the seat and suspension for the weight and
size of the operator.
• Inspect and maintain the suspension and adjustment
mechanisms of the seat regularly.
3. Check that the machine is properly maintained.
• Tire pressure, brakes, steering, linkages, etc.
4. Steer, brake, accelerate, shift gears, move the
attachments and load the attachments smoothly.
5. Adjust the machine speed and travel path to reduce the
vibration level.
• Slow down if it is necessary when passing rough
terrain.
• Drive around obstacles and excessive rough terrain
conditions.
Safety OP001120
1-18
6. Keep the terrain on work sites where the machine is
working and traveling in good condition.
• Remove any large rocks or obstacles.
• Fill any ditches and holes.
• Provide machines for and schedule time to maintain
the terrain conditions.
7. Travel over longer distance (e.g. on public roads) at
adjusted (medium) speed.
• Always adjust the speed for preventing bouncing.
Mounting and Dismounting

Before getting on or off the machine, if there is any oil, grease,
or mud on the handrails, steps, or track shoes, wipe it off
immediately. Always keep these parts clean. Repair any
damage and tighten any loose bolts.
Never jump on or off the machine. In particular, never get on or
off a moving machine. These actions may lead to serious injury.
When getting on or off the machine, always face the machine,
and maintain three-point contact (both feet and one hand or one
foot and both hands) with the handrails, steps, and track shoes
to ensure that you support yourself securely.
Never hold any control levers when getting on or off the
machine.
Apply the door lock securely. If you grip the handrail inside the
door when moving on top of the track shoes, and the door lock is
not applied securely, the door may move and cause you to fall.
Use the points marked by arrows in the diagram when getting on
or off the machine.
FG000355
Figure 3
Safety OP001120
1-19
Fuel, Oil and Hydraulic Fluid Fire Hazards
Fuel, oil and antifreeze will catch fire if it is brought close to a
flame. Fuel is particularly flammable and can be hazardous.
Always strictly observe the following.
Add fuel, oil, antifreeze and hydraulic fluid to the machine only in
a well ventilated area. The machine must be parked with
controls, lights and switches turned "OFF". The engine must be
"OFF" and any flames, glowing embers, auxiliary heating units
or spark causing equipment must be doused, turned "OFF" and/
or kept well clear of the machine.
Static electricity can produce dangerous sparks at the fuel filling
nozzle. In very cold, dry weather or other conditions that could
produce a static discharge, keep the tip of the fuel nozzle in
constant contact with the neck of the fuel filling nozzle, to
ARO1050S
provide a ground.
Figure 4
Keep fuel and other fluid reservoir caps tight and do not start the
engine until caps have been secured.
Precautions When Handling Fluids at High

Temperature
Immediately after operations are stopped, the coolant, engine
oil, and hydraulic oil are at high temperature and the radiator
and hydraulic tank are still under pressure. Attempting to
remove the cap, drain the oil or coolant, or replace the filters
may lead to serious burns. Always wait for the temperature to go
down, and follow the specified procedures when carrying out
these operations.
HAOA050L
Figure 5
To prevent hot coolant from spurting out, shut down engine, wait
for the coolant to cool, then loosen the cap slowly to relieve the
pressure.
To prevent hot oil from spurting out, shut down engine, wait for
the oil to cool, then loosen the cap slowly to relieve the pressure.
HAOA060L
Figure 6
Safety OP001120
1-20
Asbestos Dust Hazard Prevention
Asbestos dust can be HAZARDOUS to your health if it is
inhaled. Materials containing asbestos fiber can be present on
work site. Breathing air that contains asbestos fiber can
ultimately cause serious or fatal lung damage. To prevent lung
damage from asbestos fiber, observe following precautions;
• Use a respirator that is approved for use in an
asbestos-laden atmosphere.
• Never use compressed air for cleaning.
ARO1770L
• Use water for cleaning to keep down the dust. Figure 7
• Work on the machine or component with the wind at
your back whenever possible.
• Always observe any rules and regulations related to
the work site and working environment.
Injury from Work Equipment

Do not enter or put your hand, arm or any other part of your body
between movable parts, such as between the work equipment
and cylinders, or between the machine and work equipment.
If the control levers are operated, the clearance between the
machine and the work equipment will change and this may lead
to serious damage or personal injury.
If going between movable parts is necessary, always position
and secure the work equipment so that it cannot move.
HDO1010L
Figure 8
Fire Extinguisher and First Aid Kit

As a precaution if any injury or fire should occur, always do the
following.
• Be sure that fire extinguishers have been provided
and read the labels to ensure that you know now to
use them. It is recommended that an appropriately
sized (2.27 kg [5 lb] or larger) multipurpose "A/B/C"
fire extinguisher be mounted in the cabin. Check and
service the fire extinguisher at regular intervals and
make sure that all work site crew members are HDO1009L
adequately trained in its use. Figure 9
• Provide a first aid kit in the storage compartment and
keep another at the work site. Check the kit
periodically and make any additions if necessary.
• Know what to do in case of injury from fire.
• Keep emergency numbers for doctor, ambulance
service, hospital and fire department near your
telephone.
Safety OP001120
1-21
If the machine catches fire, it may lead to serious personal injury
or death. If a fire occurs during operation, escape from the
machine as follows;
• Turn the starter switch to the "O" (OFF) position and
shut down engine.
• If there is time, use the fire extinguisher to extinguish
as much of the fire as possible.
• Use the handrails and steps to escape from the
machine.
The above is the basic method for escaping from the machine,
but changing the method may be necessary according to the
conditions, so carry out practice drills at the work site.
Protection from Falling or Flying Objects

On work sites where there is danger that falling objects or flying
objects may hit the operator's cabin select a guard to match the
operating conditions to protect the operator.
Working in mines, tunnels, deep pits or on loose or wet surfaces
could produce danger of falling rock or hazardous flying objects.
Additional protection for the operator's cabin could be required in
the form of a FOPS (Falling Object Protective Structure) or
window guards.
HAOA110L
Figure 10
Never attempt to alter or modify any type of protective structure

reinforcement system, by drilling holes, welding, remounting or
relocating fasteners. Any serious impact or damage to the
system requires a complete integrity reevaluation.
Reinstallation, recertification and/or replacement of the system
may be necessary.
Contact your DOOSAN distributor for available safety guards
and/or recommendations if there is any danger of getting hit by
objects that could strike the operator's cabin. Make sure that all
other work site crew members are kept well away from the
excavator and safe from possible hazards. HAOA100L
Figure 11
For breaker operation, install a front guard and apply a
laminated coating sheet to the front glass. Contact your
DOOSAN distributor for recommendations.
When carrying out demolition or cutting operation, install a front
guard and top guard, and apply a laminated coating sheet to the
front glass.
When working in mines or quarries where there is danger of
falling rock, install FOPS (Falling Objects Protective Structure)
and apply a laminated coating sheet to the front glass.
If any glass on the machine is broken, replace it with new glass
immediately.
Safety OP001120
1-22
Attachment Precautions
Option kits are available through your dealer. Contact DOOSAN
for information on available one-way (single-acting) and two-way
(double-acting) piping / valving / auxiliary control kits. Because
DOOSAN cannot anticipate, identify or test all of the
attachments that owners may wish to install on their machines,
please contact DOOSAN for authorization and approval of
attachments, and their compatibility with options kits.
Accumulator
The pilot control system is equipped with an accumulator. For a
brief period of time after the engine has been shut down, the
accumulator will store a pressure charge that may enable
hydraulic controls to be activated. Activation of any controls may
enable the selected function to operate under force of gravity.
When performing maintenance on the pilot control system, the
hydraulic pressure in the system must be released as describe
in “Handling of Accumulator” on page 4-86.
The accumulator is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas, so
it is extremely dangerous if it is handled in the wrong way.
Always observe the following precautions;
• Do not drill or make any holes in the accumulator or
expose it any flame, fire or heat source.
• Do not weld on the accumulator, or try attaching
anything to it.
• When carrying out disassembly or maintenance of
the accumulator, or when disposing of the
accumulator, the charged gas must be properly
released. Contact your DOOSAN distributor.
• Wear safety goggles and protective gloves when
working on an accumulator. Hydraulic oil under
pressure can penetrate the skin and cause serious
injuries.
Indoor Ventilation
Engine exhaust gases can cause fatal accidents, and
unconsciousness, loss of alertness, judgement and motor
control and serious injury.
Make sure there is adequate ventilation before starting the
engine in any enclosed area.
You should also be aware of open windows, doors or ductwork
into which exhaust may be carried, or blown by the wind,
exposing others to danger.
ARO1770L
Figure 12
Safety OP001120
1-23
Emergency Exit
This machine is equipped with a glass breaking tool. It is behind
the operator seat in the upper right corner of the cabin. This tool
can be used in case of an emergency situation that requires the
breaking of glass to exit from the operator's cabin. Grip the
handle firmly and use the sharp point to break the glass.
WARNING
FG000178
Protect your eyes when breaking the glass. Figure 13
Safety OP001120
1-24
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
Work Site Precautions

Before starting operations, thoroughly check the area for any
unusual conditions that could be dangerous.
Check the terrain and condition of the ground at the work site,
and determine the best and safest method of operation.
Make the ground surface as hard and horizontal as possible
before carrying out operations. If there is a lot of dust and sand
on the work site, spray water before starting operations.
If you need to operate on a street, protect pedestrians and cars
by designating a person for work site traffic duty or by erecting DANGER
fences and posting "No Entry" signs around the work site. No Entry
FG000400
Erect fences, post "No Entry" signs, and take other steps to prevent
people from coming close to or entering the work site. If people Figure 14
come close to a moving machine, they may be hit or caught by the
machine, and this may lead to serious personal injury or death.
Water lines, gas lines, phone lines and high voltage electrical
lines may be buried under the work site. Contact each utility and
identify their locations. Be careful not to damage or cut any of
these lines.
Check the condition of the river bed, and the depth and flow of
the water before operating in water or crossing a river. NEVER
be in water that is in excess of the permissible water depth.
Any type of object in the vicinity of the boom could represent a
potential hazard, or cause the operator to react suddenly and
cause an accident. Use a spotter or signal person working near
bridges, phone lines, work site scaffolds, or other obstructions.
FG000363
Figure 15
Minimum levels of insurance coverage, work permits or

certification, physical barriers around the work site or restricted
hours of operation may be mandated by governing authorities.
There may also be regulations, guidelines, standards or
restrictions on equipment that may have to be followed for local
requirements. There may also be regulations related to performing
certain kinds of work. If there is any question about whether your
machine and work site complies with the applicable standards and
regulations contact your local authorities and agencies.
Avoid entering soft ground. It will be difficult for the machine to
escape.
FG000372
Avoid operating your machine to close to the edge of cliffs,
overhangs, and deep ditches. The ground may be weak in such Figure 16
areas. If the ground should collapse, the machine could fall or tip
over and this could result in serious injury or death.
Remember that the soil after heavy rain, blasting or after
earthquakes, is weakened in these areas.
Earth laid on the ground and the soil near ditches is loose. It can
collapse under the weight of vibration of your machine and
cause your machine to tip over.
Install the head guard (FOPS) if working in areas where there is
danger of falling rocks.
Safety OP001120
1-25
Checks Before Starting Engine
Every day before starting the engine for the first time, carry out
the following checks. If these checks are not carried out
properly, there is danger of serious injury.
Completely remove all wood chips, leaves, grass, paper and other
flammable materials accumulated in the engine compartment and
around the battery. They could cause a fire. Remove any dirt from
the window glass, mirrors, handrails, and steps.
Do not leave tools or spare parts laying around in the operator's
compartment. The vibration of the machine when traveling or
during operations may cause them to fall and damage or break the
control levers or switches. They may also get caught in the gap of
the control levers and cause the work equipment to malfunction or
move dangerously. This may lead to unexpected accidents.
Check the coolant level, fuel level, and hydraulic tank oil level, and
check for clogged air cleaner and damage to the electrical wiring.
Adjust the operator's seat to a position where it is easy to
operate the machine, and check the seat belt and mounts for
damage and wear.
Check the operation of the gauges and the angle of the mirrors,
and check that the safety lever is in "LOCKED" position.
If any abnormalities are found in the above checks, carry out
repairs immediately.
Engine Starting
Walk around your machine before getting in the operator's
cabin. Look for evidence of leaking fluid, loose fasteners,
misaligned assemblies or any other indications of possible
equipment hazard.
All equipment covers and machinery safety guards must be in
place, to protect against injury while the machine is being operated.
Look around the work site area for potential hazards, people or
properly that could be at risk while operation is in progress.
NEVER start the engine if there is any indication that
maintenance or service work is in progress, or if a warning tag is
attached to controls in the cabin.
A machine that has not been used recently, or is being operated
in extremely cold temperatures, could require a warm-up or
maintenance service before start-up.
Check gauges and monitor displays for normal operation before
starting the engine. Listen for unusual noises and remain alert for
other potentially hazardous conditions at the start of the work cycle.
Do not short circuit the starting motor to start the engine. This is
not only dangerous, but may also damage the machine.
When starting the engine, sound the horn as an alert.
Start and operate the machine only while seated.
Safety OP001120
1-26
Before Operating Machine
If checks are not carried out properly after starting the engine, it
may result in a delay in discovering abnormalities in the
machine, and this may lead to personal injury or damage to the
machine.
Carry out the checks in an open area where there are no
obstructions. Do not let anyone near the machine when carrying
out the checks.
• Check the operating condition of the equipment, and
the actuation of the bucket, arm, boom, travel, and
swing systems.
• Check the machine for any abnormal noise, vibration,
heat, smell, or abnormality with the gauges. Check
also for leakage of air, oil, and fuel.
• If any abnormality is found, repair the problem
immediately. If the machine is used without repairing
the problems, it may lead to unexpected injury or
failure.
• Clear all personnel from directly around machine and
from the area.
• Clear all obstacles from the machine's path. Beware
of hazards.
• Be sure that all windows are clean. Secure the doors
and the windows in the open position or in the shut
position.
• Adjust the rear view mirrors for best visibility close to
the machine. Make sure that the horn, the travel
alarm (if equipped), and all other warning devices are
working properly.
• Fasten the seat belt securely.
• Warm up the engine and hydraulic oil before
operating machine.
• Before moving the machine, check the position of
undercarriage. The normal travel position is with idler
wheels to the front under the cabin and the drive
sprockets to the rear. When the undercarriage is in
the reversed position, the travel controls must be
operated in opposite directions.
Safety OP001120
1-27
MACHINE OPERATION
When Swinging or Changing Direction of

Travel
Before operating the machine or the work equipment, always
observe the following precautions to prevent serious injury or
death.
• Start and operate the machine only while seated.
• When changing the direction of travel from forward to
reverse or from reverse to forward, reduce speed
early and stop the machine before changing the HAOA190L
direction of travel. Figure 17
• Sound the horn to warn people in the area.
• Check that there is no one in the area around the
machine. There are blind spots behind the machine,
so if necessary, swing the upper structure to check
that there is no one behind the machine before
traveling in reverse.
• When operating in areas that may be hazardous or
have poor visibility, designate a person to direct work
site traffic.
• Ensure that no unauthorized person can come within
the turning radius or direction of travel.
Be sure to observe the above precautions even if a travel alarm
or mirrors are installed.
Safety OP001120
1-28
Travel Precautions Travel Posture
Never turn the starting switch to the "O" (OFF) position when
traveling. It is dangerous if the engine stops when the machine
is traveling. It will be impossible to operate the steering.
Attachment control levers should not be operated while
traveling.
Do not change selected travel mode (FAST/SLOW) while
traveling.
40 ~ 50 cm (16 ~ 20 in.)
Fold in work equipment so that the outer end of the boom is as
close to the machine as possible, and is 40 - 50 cm (16 - 20 in)
above ground. Incorrect
Never travel over obstacles or slopes that will cause the

machine to tilt severely. Travel around any slope or obstacle that
causes the machine to tilt 10 degrees or more to the right or left,
or 30 degrees or more from front to rear.
Do not operate the steering suddenly. The work equipment may
FG015845
hit the ground and cause the machine to lose its balance, and
this may damage the machine or structures in the area. Figure 18
When traveling on rough ground, travel at low speed, and avoid

sudden changes in direction.
Always keep to the permissible water depth. Permissible water
depth is to the center line of the upper track rollers.
When traveling over bridges or structures on private land, check
first that the bridge or structure can withstand the weight of the
machine. When traveling on public roads, check with the local
authorities and follow their instructions.
Safety OP001120
1-29
Traveling on Slopes
Never jump onto a machine that is running away to stop it. There
is danger of serious injury.
Traveling on slopes could result in the machine tipping over or
20 ~
slipping. 30 c
m
On hills, banks or slopes, carry the bucket approximately 20 - 30
cm (8 - 12 in) above the ground. In case of an emergency,
quickly lower the bucket to the ground to help stop the machine.
Do not travel on grass, fallen leaves, or wet steel plates. Even
slight slopes may cause the machine to slip to the side, so travel
at low speed and make sure that the machine is always traveling
directly up or down the slope.
Avoid changing the direction of travel on a slope. This could
result in tipping or side slipping of the machine.
When possible, operate the machine up slopes and down
cm
slopes. Avoid operating the machine across the slope, when ~ 30
possible. 20
FG015754
Figure 19
Safety OP001120
1-30
Prohibited Operations
Do not dig the work face under an overhang. This may cause the
overhang to collapse and fall on top of the machine.
FG015755
Figure 20
Do not carry out deep digging under the front of the machine.
The ground under the machine may collapse and cause the
machine to fall.
Working heavy loads over loose, soft ground or uneven, broken
terrain can cause dangerous side load conditions and possible
tipover and injury. Travel without a load or a balanced load may
also be hazardous.
Never relay on lift jacks or other inadequate supports when work
is being done. Block tracks fore and aft to prevent any
movement.
FG015756
Figure 21
When using the machine, to prevent accidents caused by

damage to the work equipment and overturning because of an
excessive load, do not use the machine in excess of its ability (in
terms of the maximum load and stability determined by the
structure of the machine).
When working at the edge of an excavation or on a road
shoulder, the machine could tip over, possibly resulting in
serious injury or death. Investigate the configuration and ground
conditions of the work site beforehand to prevent the machine
from falling and to prevent the ground, stockpiles, or banks from
collapsing. FG015757
Figure 22
Safety OP001120
1-31
Precautions for Operation
Be careful not to go close to the edge of a cliff by mistake.
Use the machine only for its main purpose. Using it for other
purposes will cause failures.
To ensure an ample view, do as follows:
• When working in dark areas, attach working lights
and front lights to the machine. If necessary, set up
lighting at the work site.
• Stop operations when the visibility is poor, such as in
fog, mist, snow, and rain. Wait for the visibility to
improve to a level which causes no problems for the
operation.
To avoid hitting the work equipment, always do the following;
• When working in tunnels, on bridges, under electric
wires, or when parking the machine or carrying out
other operations in places with limited height, be
extremely careful not to hit the bucket or other parts.
• To prevent collisions, operate the machine at a safe
speed when working in confined spaces, indoors, or
in crowded areas.
• Do not pass the bucket over the heads of workers or
over the operator's compartment of dump truck. FG000430
Figure 23
Avoid High Voltage Cables

Serious injury or death can result from contact or proximity to
high voltage electric lines. The bucket does not have to make
physical contact with power lines for current to be transmitted.
Use a spotter and hand signals to stay away from power lines
not clearly visible to the operator.
Voltage Minimum Safe Distance

6.6 kV 3 m (9' 10")
FG015758
33.0 kV 4 m (13' 1")
Figure 24
66.0 kV 5 m (16' 5")
154.0 kV 8 m (26' 3")
275.0 kV 10 m (32' 10")
Use these minimum distances as a guideline only. Depending

upon the voltage in the line and atmospheric conditions, strong
current shocks can occur with the boom or bucket as far away
as 4 - 6 m (13 - 20 ft.) from the power line. Very high voltage and
rainy weather could further decrease that safety margin.
NOTE: Before starting any type of operation near power lines
(either above ground or buried cable type), you
should always contact the power utility directly and
work out a safety plan with them.
Safety OP001120
1-32
Protecting Cabin from Falling Object
(Optional)
In a work site where falling objects or flying objects are
expected, be sure to install adequate protective devices for 1
covering the cabin.
When using a breaker, be sure to install the front window
protection guard (Figure 25).
FG000112
Figure 25
In a work site where falling rocks can cause damage and

possibly crush personnel, or in a mining operation, be sure to
install the falling object protective structure (Figure 26).
Be sure to install any other additional protective structures
required for work site conditions.
When the falling object protective structure is installed, and the
front window needs to be cleaned, loosen the bolts marked with
an arrow. Be sure to tighten bolts when done. 2
Operate Carefully on Snow, Ice and in Very

Cold Temperatures
In icy cold weather avoid sudden travel movements and stay
away from even slight slopes. The machine could skid off to one
side very easily.
Snow accumulation could hide or obscure potential hazards.
Use care while operating or while using the machine to clear FG000113
snow. Figure 26
Warming up the engine for a short period may be necessary, to
avoid operating with sluggish or reduced working capacity. The
jolting shocks and impact loads caused by bumping or
bottoming the boom or attachment are more likely to cause
severe stress in very cold temperatures. Reducing work cycle
rate and work load may be necessary.
When the temperature rises, frozen road surfaces become soft,
so the machine travel becomes unstable.
In cold weather, do not touch metal surfaces with your bare
hands. If you touch a metal surface in extremely cold weather,
your skin may freeze to the metal surface.
Safety OP001120
1-33
Operations on Slopes
When working on slopes. there is danger that the machine may
lose its balance and turn over, when swinging, or when work
equipment is operated. Always carry out these operations
carefully.
Do not swing the work equipment from the uphill side to the
downhill side when the bucket is loaded. This operation is
dangerous.
If the machine has to be used on a slope, pile the soil to make a FG015846
platform that will keep the machine as horizontal as possible. Figure 27
In addition, lower the bucket as far as possible, keep it pulled
into the front, and keep the swing speed as low as possible.
Parking Machine
Avoid making sudden stops, or parking the machine wherever it
happens to be at the end of the work day. Plan ahead so that the 120
excavator will be on firm, level ground away from traffic and
away from high walls, cliff edges and any area of potential water
accumulation or runoff. If parking on inclines is unavoidable,
Block
block the crawler tracks to prevent movement. Lower the bucket
or other working attachment completely to the ground, or to an
overnight support saddle. There should be no possibility of
unintended or accidental movement.
When parking on public roads, provide fences, signs, flags, or
lights, and put up any other necessary signs to ensure that
passing traffic can see the machine clearly, and park the
machine so that the machine, flags, and fences do not obstruct Unlock
traffic.
After the front attachment has been lowered to an overnight
storage position and all switches and operating controls are in Lock FG015847
the "OFF" position, the safety lock lever must be set to the Figure 28
"LOCKED" position. This will disable all pilot circuit control
functions.
Always close the door of the operator's compartment.
Never Let Anyone Ride on Attachment

Never let anyone ride on any work attachment, such as the
bucket, crusher, grapple, or clamshell (grab bucket). There is a
danger of the person falling and suffering serious injury.
ARO1310L
Figure 29
Safety OP001120
1-34
MAINTENANCE
Warning Tag
Alert others that service or maintenance is being performed and WARNING
tag operator's cabin controls – and other machine areas if
required – with a warning notice. OSHA mandated control lever
lockout can be made with any OSHA certified lockout device and
DO NOT OPERATE
a length of chain or cable to keep the safety lever in the fully when performing inspection
lowered, nonactive position.
or maintenance
Warning tags, for controls are available from DOOSAN
190-00695A
distributors.
FG012195
Figure 30
Clean Before Inspection or Maintenance

Clean the machine before carrying out inspection and
maintenance. This prevents dirt from getting into the machine
and also ensures safety during maintenance.
If inspection and maintenance are carried out when the machine
is dirty, it will become more difficult to locate the problems, and
also there is danger that you may get dirt or mud in your eyes or
that you may slip and injure yourself.
When washing the machine, do the following;
• Wear shoes with nonslip soles to prevent yourself
from slipping and falling on wet places.
• Wear safety glasses and protective clothing when
washing the machine with high-pressure steam.
• Take action to prevent touching high-pressure water
and cutting your skin or having mud fly into your
eyes. ARO1330L
Figure 31
• Do not spray water directly on electrical components
(sensors, connector). If water gets into the electrical
system, there is danger that it will cause defective
operation and malfunction.
Pick up any tools or hammers that are laying in the work place,
wipe up any grease or oil or any other slippery substances, and
clean the area to make it possible to carry out the operation in
safety. If the work place is left untidy, you may trip or slip and
suffer injury.
Safety OP001120
1-35
Proper Tools
Use only tools suited to the task. Using damaged, low qualify,
faulty, or makeshift tools could cause personal injury. There is
danger that pieces from, chisels with crushed heads, or
hammers, may get into your eyes and cause blindness.
HDO1037L
Figure 32
Use of Lighting
When checking fuel, oil, battery electrolyte, or window washing
fluid, always use lighting with antiexplosion specifications. If
such lighting equipment is not used, there is danger of an
explosion.
If work is carried out in dark places without using lighting, it may
lead to injury, so always use proper lighting.
Even if the place is dark, never use a lighter or flame instead of
lighting. There is danger of fire. There is also danger that the
HDO1040L
battery gas may catch fire and cause and explosion.
Figure 33
Fire Prevention and Explosion Prevention

All fuels, most lubricants and some coolant mixtures are
flammable. Leaking fuel or fuel that is spilled onto hot surfaces
or onto electrical components can cause a fire.
Store all fuels and all lubricants in properly marked containers
and away from all unauthorized persons.
Store oily rags and other flammable material in a protective
container.
Do not smoke while you refuel the machine or while you are in a
HDO1015I
refueling area.
Figure 34
Do not smoke in battery charging areas or in areas the contain
flammable material.
Clean all electrical connections and tighten all electrical
connections. Check the electrical wires daily for wires that are
loose of frayed. Tighten all lose electrical wires before you
operate the machine. Repair all frayed electrical wires before
you operate the machine.
Remove all flammable materials before they accumulate on the
machine.
Do not weld on pipes or on tubes that contain flammable fluids.
Do not flame cut on pipes or on tubes that contain flammable
fluids. Before you weld on pipes or on tubes or before you flame
cut on pipes or on tubes, clean the pipes or tubes thoroughly
with a nonflammable solvent.
Safety OP001120
1-36
Burn Prevention
When checking the radiator coolant level, shut down engine, let
the engine and radiator cool down, then check the coolant
recovery tank. If the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is
near the upper limit, there is enough coolant in the radiator.
Loosen the radiator cap gradually to release the internal
pressure before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank is below the

lower limit, add coolant.
Cooling system conditioner contains alkali. Alkali can cause
personal injury. Do not allow alkali to contact the skin, the eyes,
or the mouth.
Allow cooling system components to cool before you drain the
cooling system.
Hot oil and hot components can cause personal injury. Do not
allow hot oil or hot components to contact the skin.
Remove the hydraulic tank filter plug only after the engine has
been stopped. Make sure that the hydraulic tank filter plug is
cool before you remove it with your bare hand. Remove the
hydraulic tank filter plug slowly to relieve pressure.
Relieve all pressure in the hydraulic oil system, in the fuel
system, or in the cooling system before you disconnect any
lines, fittings, or related items.
Batteries give off flammable fumes that can explode.
Do not smoke while you are checking the battery electrolyte
levels.
Electrolyte is an acid. Electrolyte can cause personal injury. Do
not allow electrolyte to contact the skin or the eyes.
Always wear protective glasses when you work on batteries.
HAAE2090
Figure 35
Safety OP001120
1-37
Welding Repairs
CAUTION
When you connect or disconnect connectors between ECU
and Engine or connector between ECU and the machine,
always disconnect the source power to protect damage of
the ECU.
If you don't observe this procedure, the ECU would be
damaged or the engine would operate abnormally.
When carrying out welding repairs, carry out the welding in a

properly equipped place. The welding should be performed by a
qualified worker. During welding operations, there is the danger
of, generation of gas, fire, or electric shock, so never let an
unqualified worker do welding.
The qualified welder must do the following;
• To prevent explosion of the battery, disconnect the
battery terminals and remove batteries.
• To prevent generation of gas, remove the paint from
the location of the weld.
• If hydraulic equipment, piping or places close to them
are heated, a flammable gas or mist will be generated
and there is danger of it catching fire. To avoid this,
never subject these places to heat.
• Do not weld on pipes or on tubes that contain
flammable fluids. Do not flame cut on pipes or on
tubes that contain flammable fluids. Before you weld
on pipes or on tubes or before you flame cut on pipes
or on tubes, clean the pipes or tubes thoroughly with
a nonflammable solvent.
• If heat is applied directly to rubber hoses or piping
under pressure, they may suddenly break so cover
them with a fireproof covering.
• Wear protective clothing.
• Make sure there is good ventilation.
• Remove all flammable objects and provide a fire
extinguisher.
Safety OP001120
1-38
Preparation for Electrical Welding on Body Structure
To prevent damage to ECU by electrical welding, please
observe the following procedures:
1. Open the door of the battery cover. ON OFF
2. "ON" selected switch turn on lift direction "OFF" in the cut
off switch.
3. Open the valve room door, and after that detach the
connector (1) from the ECU that are installed at the wall.
4. Proceed with welding. FG015761
Figure 36
5. After welding, carefully reassemble the connector.

6. Return "ON" selected switch panel in the cut off switch.
7. Reassemble the undercover under the engine.
8. Close the cover of the battery.
1
1
FG015762
Figure 37
Warning for Counterweight and Front

Attachment Removal
DANGER
DOOSAN warns any user, that the removal of the
counterweight from the machine, front attachment or any
other part, may affect the stability of the machine. This
could cause unexpected movement, resulting in death or
serious injuries. DOOSAN is not liable for any misuse.
Never remove the counterweight or front attachment unless
the upper structure is in-line with the lower structure.
FG015763
Never rotate the upper structure once the counterweight or
Figure 38
front attachment has been removed.
Safety OP001120
1-39
Precautions for Removal, Installation, and
Storage of Attachments
Before starting removal and installation of attachments, decide
the team leader.
Do not allow anyone except the authorized workers close to the
machine or attachment.
Place attachments that have been removed from the machine in
a safe place so that they do not fall. Put up a fence around the
attachments and take other measures to prevent unauthorized HDO1041L
persons from entering. Figure 39
Precautions When Working on Machine

When carrying out maintenance operations on the machine,
keep the area around your feet clean and tidy to prevent you
from falling. Always do the following;
• Do not spill oil or grease.
• Do not leave tools laying about.
• Watch your step when walking.
Never jump down from the machine. When getting on or off the
ARO1380L
machine, use the steps and handrails, and maintain a
Figure 40
three-point contact (both feet and one hand or both hands and
one foot) to support yourself securely.
If the job requires it, wear protective clothing.
To prevent injury from slipping or falling, when working on the
hood or covers, never use any part except the inspection
passage fitted with nonslip pads.
Lock Inspection Covers

When carrying out maintenance with the inspection cover open,
lock the cover securely in position with the lock bar.
If maintenance work is carried out with the inspection cover
open but not locked, there is danger that it may suddenly close
and cause injury if there is a gust of wind.
Safety OP001120
1-40
Crushing Prevention and Cutting
Prevention
You should always have at least two people working together if
the engine must be run during service. One person needs to
remain in the operator's seat, ready to work the controls or stop
the machine and shut off the engine.
Unless you are instructed otherwise, never attempt adjustments
while the machine is moving or while the engine is running.
Stay clear of all rotating parts and moving parts.
Keep objects away from moving fan blades. The fan blades will
throw objects and the fan blades can cut objects.
Do not use a wire rope cable that is kinked or flayed. Wear
gloves when you handle a wire rope cable.
When you strike a retainer pin, the retainer pin might fly out. The
loose retainer pin can injure personnel. Make sure that the area is
clear of people when you strike a retainer pin. To avoid injury to
your eyes, wear protective glasses when you strike a retainer pin.
Track Tension Adjustments Require

Caution
Never turn out the track tension grease fitting nut. To release
pressure from the crawler frame track tension assembly, you
should NEVER attempt to disassemble the track adjuster or
attempt to remove the grease fitting or valve assembly.
Keep your face and body away from the valve. Refer to the track
adjustment procedure in the Operator and Maintenance Manual
or Shop Manual.
HAOA110L
Figure 41
Supports and Blocking for Work

Equipment
Do not allow weight or equipment loads to remain suspended.
Lower everything to the ground before leaving the operator's
seat.
Do not use hollow, cracked or unsteady wobbling supports.
Do not work under any equipment supported only by a lifting
jack.
HDO1042L
Figure 42
Safety OP001120
1-41
Action When Abnormality Is Found During
Inspection
If any abnormality is found during inspection, always carry out
repairs. In particular, if the machine is used when there are still
problems with the brake or work equipment systems, it may lead
to serious injury.
If necessary depending on the type of failure, please contact
your DOOSAN distributor for repairs.
Precautions with High-pressure Lines,

Tubes and Hoses X
When inspecting or replacing high-pressure piping or hoses,
check that the pressure has been released from the circuit.
Failure to release the pressure may lead to serious injury.
Always do the following;
• Wear protective glasses and leather gloves.
• Fluid leaks from hydraulic hoses or pressurized X
components can be difficult to see but pressurized oil
has enough force to pierce the skin and cause
serious injury. Always use a piece of wood or
cardboard to check for suspected hydraulic leaks.
Never use your hands or expose your fingers.
• Do not bend high-pressure lines. Do not strike
high-pressure lines. Do not install lines, tubes or
hoses that are bent or damaged.
• Make sure that all clamps, guards and heat shields
are installed correctly to prevent vibration, rubbing
against other parts, and excessive heat during
operation.
HDO1045I
– If any of the following conditions are found, Figure 43
replace the part.
– Damage or leakage from hose end.
– Wear, damage, cutting of covering, or exposure
of strengthening wire layer.
– Cover portion is swollen in places.
– There is twisting or crushing at movable parts of
hose.
– Foreign material is embedded in the covering.
– Hose end is deformed.
NOTE: Refer to “Hose In-service Lifetime Limit
(European Standard ISO 8331 and
EN982 CEN)” on page 4-59, for additional
European regulations.
Safety OP001120
1-42
Waste Materials
Physical contact with used motor oil may pose a health risk.
X
Wipe oil from your hands promptly and wash off any remaining
residue.
Used motor oil is an environmental contaminant and may only
be disposed of at approved collection facilities. To prevent
pollution of the environment, always do the following;
• Never dump waste oil in a sewer system, rivers, etc.
• Always put oil drained from your machine in HAOA470L
containers. Never drain oil directly onto the ground. Figure 44
• Obey appropriate laws and regulations when
disposing of harmful materials such as oil, fuel,
solvent, filters, and batteries.
Safety OP001120
1-43
BATTERY
Battery Hazard Prevention

Battery electrolyte contains diluted sulfuric acid and batteries
generate hydrogen gas. Hydrogen gas is highly explosive, and
mistakes in handling them can cause serious injury or fire. To
prevent problems, always do the following;
• Do not smoke or bring any flame near the battery.
• When working with batteries, ALWAYS wear safety
glasses and rubber gloves.
• If you spill battery electrolyte on yourself or your
clothes, immediately flush the area with water.
• If battery electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush them
immediately with large quantities of water and see a
doctor at once.
• If you accidentally drink battery electrolyte, drink a
large quantity of water or milk, raw egg or vegetable
oil. Call a doctor or poison prevention center
immediately.
• When cleaning the top surface of the battery, wipe it
with a clean, damp cloth. Never use gasoline, thinner,
or any other organic solvent or detergent.
• Tighten the battery caps securely.
• If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the
battery or start the engine with power from another
source. There is danger that the battery may catch
fire.
• When charging the battery or starting with power
from another source, let the battery electrolyte melt
and check that there is no leakage of battery
electrolyte before starting the operation.
• Always remove the battery from the machine before
charging.
Figure 45
Safety OP001120
1-44
Boost Starting or Charging Engine
Batteries
If any mistake is made in the method of connecting the booster
cables, it may cause an explosion or fire. Always do the
following;
• Turn off all electrical equipment before connecting
leads to the battery. This includes electrical switches
on the battery charger or boost starting equipment.
• When boost starting from another machine or vehicle HAOA310L
do not allow the two machines to touch. Wear safety Figure 46
glasses or goggles while required battery
connections are made.
• 24 volt battery units consisting of two series
connected twelve volt batteries have a cable
connecting one positive terminal on one of the 12 volt
batteries to a negative terminal on the other battery.
Booster or charger cable connections must be made
between the nonseries connected positive terminals
and between the negative terminal of the booster
battery and the metal frame of the machine being
boosted or charged. Refer to the procedure and
illustration in “Starting Engine With a Booster Cable”
on page 3-7 of this manual.
• Connect positive cable first when installing cables
and disconnect the negative cable first when
removing them. The final cable connection, at the
metal frame of the machine being charged or boost
started, should be as far away from the batteries as
possible.
Safety OP001120
1-45
TOWING
Precautions When Towing

Cloth
If any mistake is made in the method of selecting or inspecting
the towing wire or in the method of towing, it may lead to serious
personal injury. Always do the following;
• Always use the method of towing given in this
Operation and Maintenance Manual. Do not use any
other method.
Towing Wire
• Use leather gloves when handling the wire rope.
• When carrying out the preparation work for towing
with two or more workers, determine the signals to
use and follow these signals correctly.
• Always fit the towing rope to the left and right hooks
and secure in position.
• If the engine on the problem machine will not start or
there is a failure in the brake system. always contact
your DOOSAN distributor.
Towing Wire
• Never go between the towing machine and the towed FG014876
machine during the towing operation. Figure 47
• It is dangerous to carry out towing on slopes, so
select a place where the slope is gradual. If there is
no place where the slope is gradual, carry out
operations to reduce the angle of the slope before
starting the towing operation.
• When towing a problem machine, always use a wire
rope with a sufficient towing capacity.
• Do not use a frayed, kinked rope or a rope with any
loss of diameter.
• Do not use the lightweight towing hook for towing
another machine.
Safety OP001120
1-46
SHIPPING AND
TRANSPORTATION
Obey State and Local Over-the-Road

Regulations
Check state and local restrictions regarding weight, width and
length of a load before making any other preparation for
transport.
The hauling vehicle, trailer and load must all be in compliance
with local regulations governing the intended shipping route.
Partial disassembly or teardown of the excavator may be
necessary to meet travel restrictions or particular conditions at
the work site. See the Shop Manual for information on partial
disassembly.
Refer to the Transportation and Shipping section of this
Operation and Maintenance Manual for information on loading,
unloading and towing.
Safety OP001120
1-47
EXCAVATOR RATED LIFT
CAPACITY TABLES
WARNING
Let everybody be away from the boom cylinder. While lifting
operation, boom, arm, bucket hoses might burst and then
high-pressure oil will be ejected at high speed.
If that failure mode takes place, handling weight or front
structure might fall by its gravity to the ground to cause
fatal injury to the person.
When changing the hoses record the part numbers of the
hoses to factory log book.
Do the service job under the company's serviceman. Figure 48
WARNING
All rated lift capacities are based on the machine and the
load both remaining level at all times. DO NOT EXCEED THE
RATED LIFT CAPACITY. Lifting loads greater than those
shown in the rated capacity tables can cause catastrophic
equipment failure and/or structural collapse of the machine.
To operate safely the excavator should be on a firm, level and

uniformly supporting surface. The operator is expected to make
due allowance for all specific work site and lift related conditions,
and respond to changes in those conditions that could pose a
hazard. The following could all cause hazardous conditions and
accidents or injuries:
• Soft or uneven ground.
• Unlevel terrain.
• Side loads.
• Modifications or poor maintenance of the excavator.
• Failure to lift squarely over the end or over the side of
the machine.
When a load is in the air, the operator must remain alert.
• Avoid side loads that may be caused by uneven
slings, traveling with the load or swinging too quickly.
• The load can become unbalanced if the hook line is
twisted and starts to rotate. If the surface area of the
load is large enough, wind gusts can create side
loads.
• Keep the bucket hook point directly over the load.
Tag lines on opposite sides of the load can help
maintain greater stability against side loads and wind
gusts.
Safety OP001120
1-48
Avoid traveling with a suspended load. Before swinging (or if
required, traveling), bring the load into an arm position (radius
and height) that has a safer weight capacity rating and adequate
movement clearance. The operator and all work site personnel
should be thoroughly familiar with safety instructions and
procedures within this Operation and Maintenance Manual.
The following weight loads are in compliance with SAE (J1097)
and ISO applicable, recommended standards for hydraulic
excavators performing lifting operation on a firm supporting
surface. An asterisk (*) next to the lift rating indicates rated load
does not exceed 87% of hydraulic capacity. All other ratings
have been determined not to exceed 75% of tipping capacity.
Do not attempt to lift or hold any load that exceeds rated load
capacity at the specified distances (from the machine's rotation
center line and height - see "lift radius" and "lift height" in the
reference drawing, Figure 49).
Lifting Radius
Centerline
of Rotation
Lifting
Point
Lifting
Point
Height
Ground Line (Machine Supporting Surface)
FG015848
Figure 49
The weight of slings and any auxiliary lifting device (and/or the
weight difference of any attachment heavier than standard
configuration) must be deducted from the rated lift capacity to
determine allowable net lifting load. The lift point should be on
the back of the bucket, as shown in Figure 49.
IMPORTANT
Select the Digging Mode switch on the Instrument Panel
before using the excavator for lifting work. Engine and
hydraulic oil should both be fully warmed up to operating
temperature before starting a lift.
Safety OP001120
1-49
Track Width : 4.0 m (13' 1") Track
A
Boom : 7.7 m (25' 3")
Arm : 3.55 m (11' 8")
Bucket : SAE 3.3 m3 (4.3 yd3)
Shoe : 650 mm (2' 2")
Counter Weight : 8,500 kg (18,700 Ib)
B
: Rating Over Front
: Rating Over Side or 360 degree
Unit : 1,000 kg (1,000 lb)
FG015849
Figure 50
METRIC
A(m) 3 4.5 6 7.5 9
B(m)
9 9.36 * 9.36 *
7.5 11.44 * 11.44 *
6 13.62 * 13.62 * 12.03 * 11.75
4.5 26.60 * 26.60 * 18.99 * 18.99 * 15.16 * 15.16 * 12.88 * 11.2
3 21.70 * 20.62 16.70 * 14.44 13.76 * 10.63
1.5 23.51 * 19.3 17.89 * 13.62 14.47 * 10.12
0 28.31 * 28.31 * 24.09 * 18.59 18.47 * 13.07 14.81 * 9.76
-1.5 24.16 * 24.16 * 31.18 * 30.2 23.53 * 18.35 18.27 * 12.82 14.58 * 9.58
-3 32.85 * 32.85 * 28.23 * 28.23 * 21.85 * 18.45 17.14 * 12.83 13.46 * 9.63
-4.5 30.06 * 30.06 * 23.82 * 23.82 * 18.80 * 18.80 * 14.66 * 13.14
-6 17.10 * 17.10 * 13.53 * 13.53 *
A(m) 10.5 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(m)
9 8.38 * 8.38 * 9.15

7.5 8.23 * 8.23 * 9.78
6 9.72 * 8.61 8.34 * 8.34 10.28
4.5 11.41 * 8.34 8.71 * 7.53 10.65
3 11.85 * 8.02 9.34 * 7.09 10.93
1.5 12.15 7.73 10.31 * 6.94 11.10
0 11.94 7.53 11.27 7.09 10.87
-1.5 11.81 * 7.61 10.58
-3 11.93 * 8.65 10.18
-4.5 11.76 * 10.7 9.66
-6 10.71 * 10.71 * 8.99
Safety OP001120
1-50
FEET
A(ft) 10 15 20 25 30
B(ft)
30
25 25.02 * 25.02 *
20 29.50 * 29.50 * 26.17 * 25.2
15 56.84 * 56.84 * 40.86 * FALSE 32.76 * 32.76 * 27.93 * 24.05
10 46.74 * 44.45 36.07 * 31.08 29.80 * 22.82
5 50.76 * 41.55 38.67 * 29.3 31.32 * 21.74
0 64.51 * 64.51 * 52.13 * 39.96 39.94 * 28.11 32.03 * 20.96
-5 54.04 * 54.04 * 67.72 * 64.66 50.96 * 39.4 39.50 * 27.55 31.45 * 20.59
-10 73.64 * 73.64 * 61.22 * 61.22 * 47.25 * 39.63 36.95 * 27.59 28.82 * 20.72
-15 64.94 * 64.94 * 51.36 * 51.36 * 40.40 * 40.40 * 31.25 * 28.32
-20 36.15 * 36.15 * 28.29 * 28.29 *
A(ft) 35 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(ft)
30 18.55 * 18.55 * 29.66

25 18.14 * 18.14 * 32.75
20 18.36 * 18.36 * 34.85
15 24.84 * 17.83 19.15 * 16.67 36.13
10 25.71 * 17.18 20.53 * 15.64 36.68
5 26.08 16.57 22.69 * 15.3 36.53
0 25.64 16.16 24.85 15.64 35.68
-5 26.03 * 16.79 34.07
-10 26.30 * 19.19 31.58
-15 25.89 * 23.89 27.98
-20 23.32 * 23.32 * 22.71
1. Ratings are based on SAE J1097.

2. Load point is the end of arm.
3. * Rated loads are based on hydraulic capacity.
4. Rated loads do not exceed 87% of hyd. Capacity or 75% of
tipping capacity.
Safety OP001120
1-51
A
Boom : 7.7 m (25' 3")
Arm : 2.9 m (9' 6")
Shoe : 650 mm (2' 2")
B
: Rating Over Front
Unit : 1,000 kg (1,000 lb)
FG015766
Figure 51
METRIC
A(m) 3 4.5 6 7.5 9
B(m)
9
7.5 11.92 * 11.71
6 14.17 * 14.17 * 12.40 * 11.35
4.5 19.77 * 19.77 * 15.59 * 14.93 13.14 * 10.82
3 22.17 * 19.81 16.95 * 13.95 13.90 * 10.27
1.5 23.52 * 18.63 17.91 * 13.18 14.45 * 9.81
0 23.62 * 18.09 18.21 * 12.72 14.59 * 9.5
-1.5 29.07 * 29.07 * 22.62 * 18.01 17.71 * 12.56 14.08 * 9.4
-3 30.81 * 30.81 * 25.80 * 25.80 * 20.52 * 18.26 16.19 * 12.69 12.45 * 9.57
-4.5 24.55 * 24.55 * 20.93 * 20.93 * 16.92 * 16.92 * 13.03 * 13.03 *
-6 10.46 * 10.46 *
A(m)
B(m)
9 10.66 * 10.66 * 8.60

7.5 10.46 * 10.31 9.55
6 10.62 * 8.78 10.19
4.5 11.59 * 8 11.10 * 7.87 10.58
3 11.90 * 7.73 11.63 * 7.39 10.74
1.5 11.91 7.49 11.55 7.25 10.69
0 11.91 7.45 10.42
-1.5 12.10 * 8.07 9.92
-3 12.07 * 9.36 9.14
-4.5 11.58 * 11.58 * 8.00
-6 9.59 * 9.59 * 6.32
Safety OP001120
1-52
FEET
A(ft) 10 15 20 25 30
B(ft)
30
25 26.09 * 25.01
20 30.68 * 30.68 * 26.97 * 24.32
15 42.54 * 42.54 * 33.68 * 32.13 28.49 * 23.23
10 47.78 * 42.72 36.62 * 30.03 30.09 * 22.06
5 50.81 * 40.11 38.72 * 28.37 31.26 * 21.06
0 60.08 * 60.08 * 51.15 * 38.89 39.39 * 27.35 31.52 * 20.41
-5 63.27 * 63.27 * 49.02 * 38.68 38.28 * 27 30.32 * 20.21
-10 67.35 * 67.35 * 56.01 * 56.01 * 44.38 * 39.22 34.85 * 27.3
-15 53.05 * 53.05 * 45.10 * 45.10 * 36.27 * 36.27 * 27.51 * 27.51 *
-20 21.17 * 21.17 *
A(ft) 35 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(ft)
30 23.59 * 23.59 * 27.85

25 23.06 * 23.06 * 31.12
20 23.37 * 19.52 33.33
15 24.41 * 17.43 34.67
10 25.80 * 16.54 25.63 * 16.31 35.24
5 25.56 16.05 25.45 15.97 35.09
0 26.25 16.42 34.20
-5 26.68 * 17.83 32.51
-10 26.60 * 20.76 29.89
-15 25.43 * 25.43 * 26.06
-20 20.57 * 20.57 * 20.28

tipping capacity.
Safety OP001120
1-53
A
Boom : 7.7 m (25' 3")
Arm : 4.2 m (13' 9")
Shoe : 650 mm (2' 2")
B
: Rating Over Front
Unit : 1,000 kg (1,000 lb)
FG015850
Figure 52
METRIC
A(m) 1.5 3 4.5 6 7.5
B(m)
9
7.5
6
4.5 17.51 * 17.51 * 14.19 * 14.19 *
3 20.48 * 20.48 * 15.89 * 14.75
1.5 22.74 * 19.71 17.32 * 13.83
0 28.81 * 28.81 * 23.88 * 18.77 18.20 * 13.17
-1.5 22.52 * 22.52 * 32.47 * 30.04 23.85 * 18.33 18.35 * 12.79
-3 24.86 * 24.86 * 29.49 * 29.49 * 30.12 * 30.12 * 22.70 * 18.28 17.65 * 12.69
-4.5 31.53 * 31.53 * 35.41 * 35.41 * 26.36 * 26.36 * 20.30 * 18.54 15.83 * 12.86
-6 26.54 * 26.54 * 20.65 * 20.65 * 16.11 * 16.11 * 12.12 * 12.12 *
A(m) 9 10.5 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(m)
9 6.67 * 6.67 * 9.94

7.5 10.55 * 10.55 * 8.17 * 8.17 * 6.51 * 6.51 * 10.78
6 11.23 * 11.23 * 10.34 * 8.82 6.56 * 6.56 * 11.35
4.5 12.16 * 11.42 10.83 * 8.49 6.79 * 6.74 11.70
3 13.17 * 10.8 11.38 * 8.12 7.21 * 6.35 11.84
1.5 14.04 * 10.23 11.86 * 7.78 7.87 * 6.21 11.80
0 14.60 * 9.79 11.91 7.51 8.85 * 6.32 11.56
-1.5 14.65 * 9.52 11.76 7.37 10.36 * 6.71 11.10
-3 13.99 * 9.46 11.02 * 7.51 10.41
-4.5 12.13 * 9.66 11.02 * 9 9.43
-6 10.52 * 10.52 * 8.07
Safety OP001120
1-54
FEET
A(ft) 5 10 15 20 25
B(ft)
30
25
20
15 30.67 * 30.67 *
10 44.11 * 44.11 * 34.33 * 31.74
5 64.97 * 64.97 * 49.09 * 42.42 37.43 * 29.75
0 65.64 * 64.94 51.63 * 40.34 39.35 * 28.31
-5 50.37 * 50.37 * 70.39 * 64.34 51.61 * 39.37 39.69 * 27.49
-10 55.33 * 55.33 * 66.09 * 66.09 * 65.24 * 64.77 49.09 * 39.25 38.10 * 27.27
-15 70.41 * 70.41 * 76.49 * 76.49 * 56.88 * 56.88 * 43.70 * 39.85 33.93 * 27.68
-20 56.53 * 56.53 * 44.00 * 44.00 * 34.16 * 34.16 * 25.22 * 25.22 *
A(ft) 30 35 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(ft)
30 14.77 * 14.77 * 32.32

25 23.04 * 23.04 * 15.11 * 15.11 * 14.36 * 14.36 * 35.17
20 24.41 * 24.41 * 22.57 * 18.82 14.44 * 14.44 * 37.13
15 26.38 * 24.52 23.55 * 18.16 14.93 * 14.91 38.33
10 28.52 * 23.18 24.71 * 17.38 15.86 * 14.02 38.85
5 30.39 * 21.96 25.69 * 16.65 17.33 * 13.7 38.71
0 31.57 * 21.01 25.58 16.09 19.52 * 13.93 37.91
-5 31.64 * 20.45 25.28 15.81 22.90 * 14.82 36.40
-10 30.07 * 20.34 24.31 * 16.64 34.08
-15 25.65 * 20.83 24.27 * 20.07 30.77
-20 23.04 * 23.04 * 26.10

tipping capacity.
Safety OP001120
1-55
A
Boom : 6.65 m (21' 10")
Arm : 2.9 m (9' 6")
Shoe : 650 mm (2' 2")
B
: Rating Over Front
Unit : 1,000 kg (1,000 lb)
FG015768
Figure 53
METRIC
A(m) 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(m)
7.5 14.24 * 14.24 * 10.04 * 10.04 * 8.26
6 15.02 * 15.02 * 10.17 * 10.17 * 8.99
4.5 26.17 * 26.17 * 19.72 * 19.72 * 16.34 * 15.98 14.34 * 11.49 10.70 * 10.49 9.43
3 22.46 * 21.83 17.79 * 15.14 15.02 * 11.06 11.65 * 9.8 9.61
1.5 34.63 * 32.73 24.45 * 20.54 18.94 * 14.41 15.53 * 10.67 13.18 * 9.62 9.56
0 34.68 * 31.87 25.16 * 19.78 19.40 * 13.92 15.52 * 10.41 14.93 * 9.95 9.26
-1.5 36.17 * 36.17 * 32.71 * 31.81 24.40 * 19.52 18.81 * 13.72 15.34 * 10.96 8.68
-3 38.29 * 38.29 * 28.79 * 28.79 * 21.90 * 19.7 16.53 * 13.89 15.56 * 13.17 7.78
-4.5 28.12 * 28.12 * 22.07 * 22.07 * 16.56 * 16.56 * 15.02 * 15.02 * 6.40
FEET
A(ft) 10 15 20 25 30 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(ft)
25 31.14 * 31.14 * 22.15 * 22.15 * 26.86
20 32.69 * 32.69 * 22.38 * 22.38 * 29.38
15 56.11 * 56.11 * 42.57 * 42.57 * 35.44 * 34.35 30.73 * 24.61 23.50 * 23.23 30.89
10 68.17 * 68.17 * 48.48 * 47 38.54 * 32.56 32.61 * 23.73 25.60 * 21.64 31.54
5 74.82 * 70.31 52.86 * 44.19 41.01 * 30.99 33.65 * 22.9 29.00 * 21.21 31.37
0 75.19 * 68.33 54.46 * 42.52 41.98 * 29.92 33.50 * 22.37 32.93 * 21.93 30.37
-5 81.07 * 81.07 * 70.95 * 68.14 52.81 * 41.94 40.61 * 29.52 33.82 * 24.2 28.45
-10 83.06 * 83.06 * 62.26 * 62.26 * 47.20 * 42.35 35.27 * 29.93 34.29 * 29.23 25.41
-15 60.21 * 60.21 * 47.12 * 47.12 * 34.88 * 34.88 * 32.97 * 32.97 * 20.73

tipping capacity.
Safety OP001120
1-56
A
Boom : 6.65 m (21' 10")
Arm : 2.6 m (8' 6")
Shoe : 650 mm (2' 2")
B
: Rating Over Front
Unit : 1,000 kg (1,000 lb)
FG015769
Figure 54
METRIC
A(m) 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(m)
7.5 14.67 * 14.67 * 11.13 * 11.13 * 7.98
6 15.38 * 15.38 * 11.31 * 11.31 * 8.73
4.5 27.23 * 27.23 * 20.23 * 20.23 * 16.64 * 15.74 14.53 * 11.27 11.95 * 10.83 9.18
3 22.83 * 21.51 18.00 * 14.93 15.12 * 10.89 13.08 * 10.1 9.37
1.5 24.60 * 20.29 19.02 * 14.24 15.52 * 10.53 14.91 * 9.93 9.31
0 34.20 * 31.67 25.03 * 19.62 19.30 * 13.8 15.31 * 10.32 15.30 * 10.31 9.00
-1.5 37.60 * 37.60 * 31.83 * 31.76 23.98 * 19.45 18.46 * 13.67 15.65 * 11.46 8.41
-3 35.52 * 35.52 * 27.52 * 27.52 * 21.09 * 19.72 15.74 * 14 7.48
-4.5 24.91 * 24.91 * 20.18 * 20.18 * 14.91 * 14.91 * 14.78 * 14.78 * 6.03
FEET
A(ft) 10 15 20 25 30 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(ft)
25 30.35 * 30.35 * 24.55 * 24.55 * 25.91
20 33.47 * 33.47 * 24.89 * 24.89 * 28.53
15 58.36 * 58.36 * 43.66 * 43.66 * 36.08 * 33.82 27.11 * 24.12 26.24 * 23.99 30.08
10 49.28 * 46.33 38.97 * 32.11 32.82 * 23.34 28.73 * 22.3 30.74
5 75.09 * 69.37 53.18 * 43.66 41.16 * 30.62 33.58 * 22.61 32.79 * 21.88 30.57
0 74.21 * 67.89 54.19 * 42.18 41.75 * 29.67 33.72 * 22.74 29.54
-5 84.30 * 84.30 * 69.08 * 68.03 51.89 * 41.8 39.80 * 29.4 34.50 * 25.31 27.57
-10 77.11 * 77.11 * 59.52 * 59.52 * 45.40 * 42.41 34.68 * 31.14 24.41
-15 42.93 * 42.93 * 32.33 * 32.33 * 19.49

tipping capacity.
Safety OP001120
1-57
A
Boom : 7.7 m (25' 3")
Arm : 3.55 m (11' 8")
W/O Bucket
Shoe : 900 mm (2' 11")
B
: Rating Over Front
Unit : 1,000 kg (1,000 lb)
FG016166
Figure 55
METRIC
A(m) 3 4.5 6 7.5 9
B(m)
9 12.43 * 12.43 *
7.5 14.28 * 13.98
6 16.56 * 16.56 * 14.82 * 13.65
4.5 22.41 * 22.41 * 18.13 * 17.42 15.64 * 13.19
3 25.10 * 22.87 19.66 * 16.58 16.49 * 12.71
1.5 26.67 * 21.84 20.75 * 15.91 17.13 * 12.3
0 26.91 * 21.33 21.16 * 15.49 17.34 * 12.02
-1.5 29.60 * 29.60 * 25.98 * 21.21 20.71 * 15.32 16.88 * 11.9
-3 28.89 * 28.89 * 29.77 * 29.77 * 23.89 * 21.36 19.22 * 15.39 15.32 * 12
-4.5 29.51 * 29.51 * 24.82 * 24.82 * 20.28 * 20.28 * 16.10 * 15.73
-6 17.17 * 17.17 * 13.88 * 13.88 *
A(m)
B(m)
9 12.01 * 12.01 * 9.04

7.5 11.57 * 11.57 * 9.95
6 12.36 * 10.51 11.47 * 10.39 10.56
4.5 14.08 * 10.32 11.64 * 9.62 10.94
3 14.44 * 10.07 12.09 * 9.23 11.10
1.5 14.31 9.84 12.85 * 9.14 11.05
0 14.16 9.7 13.64 9.36 10.79
-1.5 13.92 * 9.96 10.3
-3 13.71 * 11.15 9.55
-4.5 13.01 * 13.01 * 8.47
-6 10.94 * 10.94 * 6.9
Safety OP001120
1-58
FEET
A(ft) 10 15 20 25 30
B(ft)
30
25 31.28 * 30.02
20 35.94 * 35.94 * 32.29 * 29.38
15 48.30 * 48.30 * 39.26 * 37.58 33.99 * 28.42
10 54.16 * 49.36 42.55 * 35.78 35.79 * 27.4
5 57.70 * 47.08 44.94 * 34.33 37.15 * 26.51
0 58.34 * 45.94 45.84 * 33.4 37.56 * 25.91
-5 67.61 * 67.61 * 56.36 * 45.64 44.86 * 33.03 36.46 * 25.68
-10 65.11 * 65.11 * 64.67 * 64.67 * 51.74 * 45.98 41.50 * 33.19 32.74 * 25.95
-15 63.87 * 63.87 * 53.59 * 53.59 * 43.61 * 43.61 * 34.27 * 34
-20 28.72 * 28.72 *
A(ft) 35 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(ft)
30 26.61 * 26.61 * 29.32
25 25.55 * 25.55 * 32.43
20 25.28 * 23.04 34.55
15 30.72 * 22.17 25.64 * 21.28 35.84
10 31.31 21.67 26.61 * 20.36 36.40
5 30.81 21.21 28.29 * 20.14 36.25
0 30.53 20.94 30.06 20.63 35.39
-5 30.68 * 22 33.77
-10 30.20 * 24.68 31.25
-15 28.57 * 28.57 * 27.61
-20 23.62 * 23.62 * 22.26

tipping capacity.
Safety OP001120
1-59
A
Boom : 7.7 m (25' 3")
Arm : 2.9 m (9' 6")
W/O Bucket
Shoe : 900 mm (2' 11")
B
: Rating Over Front
Unit : 1,000 kg (1,000 lb)
FG016167
Figure 56
METRIC
A(m) 3 4.5 6 7.5 9
B(m)
9 15.99 * 15.99 *
7.5 16.38 * 16.38 * 15.25 * 13.69
6 20.83 * 20.83 * 17.49 * 17.49 * 15.57 * 13.42
4.5 23.67 * 23.67 * 18.92 * 17.07 16.24 * 13
3 20.24 * 16.29 16.92 * 12.56
1.5 21.05 * 15.72 17.36 * 12.2
0 26.56 * 21.21 21.10 * 15.4 17.29 * 11.99
-1.5 25.09 * 21.23 20.24 * 15.33 16.40 * 11.97
-3 28.80 * 28.80 * 26.91 * 26.91 * 22.44 * 21.5 18.18 * 15.52
-4.5 21.38 * 21.38 * 18.00 * 18.00 * 13.72 * 13.72 *
A(m)
B(m)
9 15.81 * 15.56 8.36

7.5 15.19 * 12.79 9.34
6 14.88 * 11.24 9.99
4.5 14.74 * 10.35 10.39
3 14.46 9.99 14.34 9.91 10.55
1.5 14.29 9.83 14.29 9.83 10.50
0 14.65 * 10.12 10.23
-1.5 14.48 * 10.88 9.72
-3 13.98 * 12.4 8.92
-4.5 12.66 * 12.66 * 7.75
Safety OP001120
1-60
FEET
A(ft) 10 15 20 25 35
B(ft)
30 35.20 * 35.20 *
25 35.70 * 35.70 * 33.56 * 29.32
20 44.94 * 44.94 * 37.94 * 37.94 * 33.96 * 28.88
15 51.00 * 51.00 * 40.96 * 36.85 35.30 * 28.01
10 43.81 * 35.17 36.73 * 27.08
5 58.36 * 46.36 45.59 * 33.91 37.63 * 26.32
0 57.66 * 45.67 45.73 * 33.21 37.42 * 25.87
-5 65.16 * 65.16 * 54.48 * 45.69 43.84 * 33.06 35.32 * 25.86
-10 63.40 * 63.40 * 58.59 * 58.59 * 48.61 * 46.29 39.17 * 33.49
-15 46.09 * 46.09 * 38.53 * 38.53 * 28.36 * 28.36 *
A(ft) MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(ft)
30 35.05 * 35.05 * 27.08

25 33.55 * 28.55 30.43
20 32.83 * 24.94 32.68
15 32.51 * 22.89 34.04
10 31.64 21.86 34.62
5 31.49 21.67 34.46
0 32.30 * 22.32 33.56
-5 31.92 * 24.04 31.84
-10 30.77 * 27.48 29.16
-15 27.68 * 27.68 * 25.19

tipping capacity.
Safety OP001120
1-61
A
Boom : 7.7 m (25' 3")
Arm : 4.2 m (13' 9")
W/O Bucket
Shoe : 900 mm (2' 11")
B
: Rating Over Front
Unit : 1,000 kg (1,000 lb)
FG016168
Figure 57
METRIC
A(m) 3 4.5 6 7.5 9
B(m)
9 13.06 * 13.06 *
7.5 13.24 * 13.24 *
6 13.90 * 13.79
4.5 20.81 * 20.81 * 17.07 * 17.07 * 14.83 * 13.28
3 23.77 * 23.25 18.75 * 16.73 15.81 * 12.75
1.5 25.84 * 21.99 20.10 * 15.95 16.62 * 12.27
0 26.67 * 21.26 20.82 * 15.42 17.06 * 11.91
-1.5 28.46 * 28.46 * 26.29 * 20.97 20.76 * 15.14 16.94 * 11.72
-3 25.99 * 25.99 * 31.78 * 31.78 * 24.77 * 21 19.76 * 15.1 15.97 * 11.71
-4.5 35.12 * 35.12 * 27.50 * 27.50 * 21.88 * 21.31 17.47 * 15.32 13.42 * 11.97
-6 21.02 * 21.02 * 16.92 * 16.92 * 12.68 * 12.68 *
A(m)
B(m)
9 9.79 * 9.79 * 9.8

7.5 10.74 * 10.74 * 9.45 * 9.45 * 10.64
6 12.95 * 10.62 9.36 * 9.36 * 11.22
4.5 13.38 * 10.35 9.47 * 8.75 11.57
3 13.89 * 10.05 9.79 * 8.4 11.72
1.5 14.24 9.76 10.34 * 8.31 11.67
0 14.01 9.56 11.18 * 8.47 11.43
-1.5 13.93 9.47 12.48 * 8.95 10.97
-3 12.88 * 9.86 10.28
-4.5 12.48 * 11.54 9.28
-6 11.28 * 11.28 * 7.88
Safety OP001120
1-62
FEET
A(ft) 10 15 20 25 30
B(ft)
30 28.82 * 28.82 *
25 28.97 * 28.97 *
20 30.28 * 29.67
15 44.87 * 44.87 * 36.96 * 36.96 * 32.22 * 28.61
10 51.29 * 50.17 40.59 * 36.08 34.30 * 27.47
5 55.88 * 47.41 43.52 * 34.4 36.04 * 26.44
0 57.77 * 45.8 45.10 * 33.23 36.98 * 25.67
-5 64.88 * 64.88 * 57.00 * 45.14 44.96 * 32.63 36.64 * 25.26
-10 58.49 * 58.49 * 68.95 * 68.95 * 53.63 * 45.19 42.71 * 32.56 34.37 * 25.27
-15 75.96 * 75.96 * 59.40 * 59.40 * 47.16 * 45.89 37.47 * 33.06 28.11 * 25.95
-20 44.75 * 44.75 * 35.79 * 35.79 * 25.95 * 25.95 *
A(ft) 35 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(ft)
30 21.69 * 21.69 * 31.85

25 20.86 * 20.86 * 34.73
20 28.34 * 22.78 20.63 * 20.63 * 36.71
15 29.17 * 22.26 20.87 * 19.33 37.93
10 30.20 * 21.62 21.55 * 18.53 38.45
5 30.65 21.03 22.77 * 18.31 38.31
0 30.19 20.6 24.66 * 18.68 37.50
-5 30.00 * 20.45 27.56 * 19.74 35.98
-10 28.37 * 21.81 33.63
-15 27.44 * 25.68 30.27
-20 24.57 * 24.57 * 25.49

tipping capacity.
Safety OP001120
1-63
A
Boom : 6.65 m (21' 10")
Arm : 2.9 m (9' 6")
W/O Bucket
Shoe : 900 mm (2' 11")
B
: Rating Over Front
Unit : 1,000 kg (1,000 lb)
FG016169
Figure 58
METRIC
A(m) 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(m)
7.5 17.77 * 17.77 * 14.78 * 14.78 * 8.02
6 18.34 * 18.34 * 14.51 * 14.22 8.77
4.5 23.43 * 23.43 * 19.57 * 17.82 17.41 * 13.4 14.74 * 12.87 9.22
3 26.05 * 23.82 20.90 * 17.14 17.88 * 13.08 15.43 * 12.22 9.41
1.5 27.69 * 22.86 21.83 * 16.58 18.13 * 12.79 16.69 * 12.11 9.35
0 27.86 * 22.36 21.93 * 16.24 17.62 * 12.64 17.49 * 12.57 9.04
-1.5 34.13 * 34.13 * 26.43 * 22.26 20.75 * 16.16 17.44 * 13.79 8.45
-3 36.04 * 36.04 * 29.20 * 29.20 * 22.96 * 22.53 17.01 * 16.48 16.88 * 16.42 7.52
-4.5 20.81 * 20.81 * 15.21 * 15.21 * 14.72 * 14.72 * 6.08
FEET
A(ft) 10 15 20 25 30 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(ft)
25 39.11 * 39.11 * 32.69 * 32.69 * 26.06
20 45.04 * 45.04 * 40.01 * 39.72 32.00 * 31.62 28.65
15 50.64 * 50.64 * 42.52 * 38.41 35.44 * 28.8 32.45 * 28.47 30.21
10 56.32 * 51.37 45.33 * 36.97 38.89 * 28.16 33.95 * 26.96 30.86
5 59.95 * 49.27 47.33 * 35.75 39.30 * 27.57 36.74 * 26.7 30.69
0 60.40 * 48.15 47.51 * 35.01 38.55 * 27.71 29.66
-5 74.18 * 74.18 * 57.27 * 47.93 44.78 * 34.87 38.43 * 30.47 27.70
-10 78.38 * 78.38 * 63.24 * 63.24 * 49.45 * 48.53 37.15 * 36.47 24.56
-15 44.18 * 44.18 * 32.06 * 32.06 * 19.68

tipping capacity.
Safety OP001120
1-64
A
Boom : 6.65 m (21' 10")
Arm : 2.6 m (8' 6")
W/O Bucket
Shoe : 900 mm (2' 11")
B
: Rating Over Front
Unit : 1,000 kg (1,000 lb)
FG016170
Figure 59
METRIC
A(m) 3 4.5 6 7.5 9 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(m)
7.5 18.55 * 18.55 * 16.75 * 16.75 * 7.71
6 21.55 * 21.55 * 18.93 * 18.35 16.40 * 14.92 8.50
4.5 24.13 * 24.13 * 20.06 * 17.76 16.64 * 13.45 8.96
3 26.59 * 23.7 21.28 * 17.11 18.16 * 13.08 17.43 * 12.75 9.15
1.5 27.96 * 22.83 22.05 * 16.59 18.21 * 12.84 17.99 * 12.66 9.09
0 27.82 * 22.41 21.93 * 16.3 18.04 * 13.18 8.77
-1.5 33.15 * 33.15 * 26.03 * 22.39 20.38 * 16.29 17.87 * 14.58 8.16
-3 32.89 * 32.89 * 27.80 * 27.80 * 22.03 * 22.03 * 17.04 * 17.04 * 7.19
-4.5 18.48 * 18.48 * 14.04 * 14.04 * 5.68
FEET
A(ft) 10 15 20 25 30 MAX. REACH
A(m)
B(ft)
25 37.58 * 37.58 * 37.05 * 37.05 * 25.05
20 46.71 * 46.71 * 41.31 * 39.5 36.16 * 33.2 27.74
15 52.16 * 52.16 * 43.59 * 38.27 36.64 * 29.76 26.34
10 57.50 * 51.12 46.15 * 36.9 38.74 * 28.17 38.36 * 28.14 30.02
5 60.56 * 49.2 47.80 * 35.78 39.66 * 27.9 29.84
0 60.33 * 48.27 47.50 * 35.15 39.77 * 29.07 28.78
-5 72.13 * 72.13 * 56.41 * 48.21 43.91 * 35.16 39.38 * 32.22 26.75
-10 71.64 * 71.64 * 60.20 * 60.20 * 47.37 * 47.37 * 37.46 * 37.46 * 23.48
-15 33.38 * 33.38 * 17.38

tipping capacity.
Safety OP001120
1-65
Safety OP001120
1-66
OP001121
2Operating Controls
The "Operating Controls" section presented here consists of the
following groups:
1. “Component Locations” on page 2-2
2. “Operator's Area” on page 2-4
3. “Operational Controls and Panels” on page 2-6
4. “Instrument Panel” on page 2-20
5. “Multifunction Gauge and Graphic Information” on
page 2-27
6. “Mode Selector Buttons” on page 2-33
7. “Setting Main Menu” on page 2-35
8. “Heater and Air Conditioner Control Panel” on page 2-49
9. “Stereo” on page 2-55
10. “Miscellaneous Electrical Devices” on page 2-56
11. “Seat Adjustment” on page 2-58
12. “Ceiling Cover” on page 2-62
13. “Front Windows” on page 2-63
14. “Door Side Latch” on page 2-65
15. “Cabin Storage Compartments” on page 2-66
16. “Ashtray” on page 2-66
17. “Sun Visor” on page 2-67
18. “Hanger” on page 2-67
19. “Cup Holder” on page 2-68
20. “Door Window Holder” on page 2-68
21. “Emergency Glass Breaking Tool” on page 2-68
22. “Miscellaneous Access Covers and Doors” on page 2-69
Each group is explained with a point location drawing or photo
and a brief description of each control, switch, gauge or valve.
Indicator lights work besides the gauges on the instrument
panel. The operator should monitor machine pressure on the
instrument panel along with indicator lights. These lights will only
show that there is a problem.
WARNING
Warning lights. When any one or more of the warning lights
on the control console, comes "ON", immediately stop
operation and shut down unit. Investigate and correct the
problem before proceeding with operation.
Operating Controls OP001121

2-1
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
15
16
37
17
18
39
38 19
20
36
21
35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
FG015770
Figure 1

2-2
Reference Reference
Description Description
Number Number
1 Arm Cylinder 21 Track Link and Shoe
2 Boom 22 Track Guard
3 Boom Cylinder 23 Upper Roller
4 Fuel Tank Fill Cap 24 Lower Roller
5 Fuel Tank 25 Cabin
6 Swing Motor 26 Track Adjuster
7 Oil Cooler 27 Work Lever Controls (Joystick)
8 Air Cleaner 28 Seat
9 Control Valves 29 Center Joint
10 Radiator 30 Idler
11 Engine 31 Travel Lever
12 Bonnet 32 Swing Bearing
13 Counterweight 33 Bucket
14 Muffler 34 Push Link
15 Return Filter 35 Guide Link
16 Pumps 36 Bucket Cylinder
17 Fuel Pre-filter 37 Arm
18 Hydraulic Oil Tank 38 Tooth Point
19 Suction Filter 39 Battery
20 Travel Motor

2-3
OPERATOR'S AREA
11
10
9 14
5
4
2 17
3
1
13
18
12
15
20
16
19
FG013745
Figure 2

2-4
Reference Reference
Number Number
Instrument Panel Storage Compartment
1 11
(See page 2-20) (See page 2-66)
Cigarette Lighter 12 Heater and Air Conditioner Unit
2
(See page 2-14) Stereo
13
Ashtray (See page 2-55)
3
(See page 2-66) Fuse Box
14
Travel Levers (See page 2-57)
4
(See page 3-15) Left-hand Work Lever (Joystick)
15
Right-hand Work Lever (See page 3-22)
5 (Joystick) Safety Lever
(See page 3-22) 16
(See page 3-13)
Storage Tray Storage Compartment
6 17
(See page 2-66) (See page 2-66)
Engine Speed Control Dial DMS Laptop Computer
7 18
(See page 2-8) Connector
Heater and Air Conditioner Cup Holder
8 Control Panel 19
(See page 2-68)
(See page 2-49)
Hour Meter
Starter Switch 20
9 (See page 2-24)
(See page 2-8)
Seat
10
(See page 2-58)

2-5
OPERATIONAL CONTROLS AND
PANELS
20 19 18 26
29 28 17 21
22
24
4 5 3 2 1 23
16 27 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 15 25
FG015771
Figure 3

2-6
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Starter Switch 16 Power Socket For 12v
2 Engine Speed Control Dial Travel / Swing Alarm Switch
17
3 Quick Clamp Switch (Optional) (Optional)
4 Auxiliary Mode Switch Overload Warning Switch
18
(Optional)
5 Engine Emergency Stop Switch
19 Fuel Heater Switch (Optional)
6 Audio Control Panel
20 Seat Warmer Switch (Optional)
7 Travel Speed Selector Switch
21 Horn Button
8 Light Switch
22 Rotating Switch
Breaker / Booster / Shear
9 23 Breaker / Booster Switch
Selector Switch
Cabin Work Light Switch 24 Shear Switch
10
(Optional) 25 Instrument Panel
11 Warning Light Switch (Optional) 26 Safety Lever
12 Lower Wiper Switch (Optional) 27 Photo Sensor
Heater And Air Conditional 28 Liftting Mode Switch
13
Control Panel Manual Operating Switch of Auto
29
14 Wiper Control Panel Greasing Device
15 Cigarette Lighter

2-7
1. Starter Switch
O I
A three-position starter switch is used to start or shut down
engine for equipment operation.
O. Turning the switch to this position turns the engine
"OFF" along with its electrical system. In this position
the engine is "OFF" but the interior cabin light and
fuel tank transfer pump (if equipped) are functional.
I. Turning the switch to this position turns the engine
electrical system "ON". When the switch is first turned
FG000014
"ON" the six indicator/warning lights across the top of
Figure 4
the instrument panel, will light for approximately two
seconds. The battery warning light and the engine oil
pressure warning light should remain "ON" after the
other four have turned "OFF".
NOTE: Preheat Indicator Light - The operation of
the preheat cycle depends on coolant
temperature. When the engine coolant is
cold enough, the preheat indicator light will
remain "ON" until the engine preheat cycle
is completed. The preheat cycle takes
about twenty seconds to complete, and
the indicator light will turn "OFF". When
the light turns "OFF", engage the starter.
. Moving switch to this position will crank engine. When

engine starts, release key and allow it to return to the
"I" (ON) position. Do not operate the starter switch for
more than fifteen seconds at a time. This will help
prevent damage to starter.
WARNING
DO NOT USE STARTING FLUIDS. The preheat system
could cause the starting fluid to explode. Starting
fluids should never be used.
2. Engine Speed Control Dial

The engine speed is controlled by the dial. Rotating it
clockwise increases engine speed (rpm) and
counterclockwise decreases engine speed.
A Low idle (Lowest engine speed)
B High idle (Highest engine speed)
NOTE: The auto idle system will automatically reduce
engine speed to idle speed approximately four
seconds after all of the control levers are in the HAOA690L
neutral position. This system is designed to Figure 5
reduce fuel consumption and noise. See “3.
Auto Idle Selector Button” on page 2-34.

2-8
3. Quick Clamp Switch (Optional)
O
Clamp releasing for dispensable attachment is controlled. I
O. In this position , the quick clamp is "LOCKED". The
attachment is secured to the arm.
I. In this position , the quick clamp is "UNLOCKED".

The attachment is released from the arm.
NOTE: To move the switch, pull up on the toggle
and then move it into the "UNLOCKED" FG001342
position. Figure 6
WARNING
When the attachment is still connected to the machine,
while the switch is "I" ( ) position, do not operate the
machine or the attachment might fall to the ground. It
would cause personnel injuries.
4. Auxiliary Mode Switch

I O
When the control system is out of order, the pump system
can be controlled manually.
O. In this position, the manual pump control is "OFF".
I. In this position, the manual pump control is "ON".
CAUTION
FG001343
Be sure to turn pump control to the "O" (OFF) position, Figure 7
after the control system is operating properly.
5. Engine Emergency Stop Switch

If the engine does not shut down when using the starter
O I
switch, it can be stopped by moving the engine emergency
stop switch to the "I" (EMERGENCY STOP) position.
O. In this position, the engine emergency stop system is
"OFF".
I. In this position, "EMERGENCY STOP" is selected.
The engine will shut down.
NOTE: 1. Press the switch "I" untill the engine stops. FG001344
2. When released, the switch will return to its Figure 8
original position "O" (OFF) position.

2-9
6. Audio Control Panel
The audio system can be remotely controlled using this
panel. SCAN
PWR
FG000018
Figure 9
Each time this power button is pressed, the audio system

is turned either "ON" or "OFF".
If the audio system turns "ON", an indicator light above the
button turns "ON".
PWR
FG000019
Figure 10
Press the up button, to "INCREASE" volume.
FG000020
Figure 11
Press the down button, to "DECREASE" volume.
FG000021
Figure 12

2-10
Manual Scan: When pressing scan button once, for less
than half-a-second, the frequency will be moved up in
sequence to the next available signal.
Auto Scan: When pressing scan button for more than a
half-a-second, the frequencies are automatically scanned
to the next higher one and will continue until the button is
again pressed to stop the scan.
SCAN
FG000022
Figure 13
7. Travel Speed Selector Switch

O
I
WARNING II
Do not operate the travel speed selector switch when
unit is in motion. Temporary loss of control could
result.
This switch activates the automatic speed range for travel. FG000023
O. In this position, "LOW" travel speed is selected. Figure 14
I. In this position, "HIGH" travel speed is selected.
II. In this position, "AUTOMATIC" travel speed is
selected. The travel speed automatically changes
between "LOW" or "HIGH" range, depending on
engine speed and travel motor loads.
8. Light Switch
This switch is used to turn "ON" the lights. O
O. In this position, all lights are "OFF".
I
II
I. In this position, all illumination lights of the instrument
panel and the control switches are turned "ON".
II. In this position, all illumination lights and work lights
are turned "ON".
FG000024
CAUTION Figure 15
Do not leave instrument panel or work lights "ON"

when the engine is not running. Leaving lights "ON"
with the engine shut down will discharge batteries.

2-11
9. Breaker / Boost / Shear Selector
Switch I
This switch is used to either select the breaker, power
O
boost, or shear. II P
RU
WE
O. In this position, a hydraulic pressure rise will be PO
activated when pressing the button on the right-hand

work lever (joystick).
I. In this position, shear is activated.
FG000025
II. In this position, breaker is activated.
Figure 16
WARNING
Before using any attachment in a work application, be
sure to check its functional control. Make sure that the
desired movement or action is being activated by the
control. e.g. opening/closing, CW/CCW, crowd/dump, etc.
10. Cabin Work Light Switch (Optional)

This switch is used to control the cabin work lights, if unit is O
equipped with them. I
O. In this position, all cabin work lights are turned "OFF". II
I. In this position, the front cabin work lights on the front
top of cabin will turn "ON".
II. In this position, the front cabin work lights on the front
top of cabin and rear cabin work lights on rear top of
cabin will turn "ON". FG000026
Figure 17
11. Warning Light Switch (Optional)

If unit is equipped with a warning light, push this switch to O
activate it.
O. In this position, the warning light is turned "OFF". I
I. In this position, the warning light turns "ON" and will
start flashing.
FG000027
Figure 18

2-12
12. Lower Wiper Switch (Optional)
This switch is used to control the lower front window wiper. O
O. In this position, lower windshield wiper is "OFF".
I. In this position, lower windshield wiper runs at a
I
constant speed.
NOTE: Operating wiper without washer fluid or when
there is sand or dirt present will damage the
window and wiper.
FG000028
Figure 19
13. Heater and Air Conditioner Control

Panel
This panel is used to control air conditioner and heater in
A/C OUTSIDE
operator's compartment. Refer to “Heater and Air AUTO
AUTO MAX
A/C
Conditioner Control Panel” on page 2-49 for more details. TEMP
OFF
SEL MODE
FG000029
Figure 20
14. Wiper Switch Panel

This panel is only for operation of the upper windshield
wiper. When the wiper stops running, it moves to right side
of the cabin, resting in its support.
NOTE: When the front window is lifted, the wiper motor
will not operate.
FG000308
Figure 21
Constant Speed Button

Pressing the button turns "ON" the windshield wiper. An
indicator light above the button will turn "ON" indicating
that the wiper is "ON". The wiper will run at a constant
speed.
Pressing the button again, turns "OFF" the windshield
wiper.
FG000241
Figure 22

2-13
Intermittent Speed Button
Pressing button once (first time):
Windshield wiper runs approximately on a three
second intermittent cycle. The left side indicator light
will turn "ON".
Pressing button again (second time):
Windshield wiper runs approximately on a six second
intermittent cycle. The right side indicator light will
turn "ON".
FG000242
Pressing button again (third time): Figure 23
Turns "OFF" the windshield wiper. Both indicator
lights will be turned "OFF".
Windshield Washer Button

Pressing the washer button will spray windshield washer
fluid onto the windshield. Use only the proper windshield
washer fluid in the system.
NOTE: Do not operate the windshield washer without
any fluid. If operate without any fluid, the
washer motor may be damaged. Check level in
washer tank, and add fluid as required.
NOTE: Using soapy water or synthetic detergent
instead of window cleaning fluid, may damage FG000243
the wiper blade or painted surfaces. Use Figure 24
standard window cleaning fluid: SSK703
15. Cigarette Lighter

R
PW
Push the lighter all the way into the socket and release
your hand. After pushing it in, it will be ejected when it is
heated. If it does not eject after a short time, pull it out and
have it serviced.
NOTE: This cigarette lighter is for 24V only. Never
connect a 12V electrical device to the lighter.
FG000030
Figure 25

2-14
16. Power Socket for 12 Volt
This is a power socket for only 12V DC devices.
This socket can be used for charging a cellular phone or
powering a small 12V DC electrical device.
Open the cap when using it.
NOTE: This socket is designed for small electrical 12 V
capacity devices. Do not use this socket for
large electrical capacity devices. Thus, damage
can be avoided. HAAE1990
Figure 26
17. Travel/Swing Alarm Switch (Optional)

If unit is equipped with a travel/swing alarm buzzer, push O
this switch to active it, whenever swinging or traveling. I
O. In this position, the travel/swing alarm system is II
turned "OFF".
I. In this position, the travel alarm will only sound, when
the machine is moving.
II. In this position, the travel/swing alarm will sound
while swinging and traveling, if equipped with a swing FG000031
alarm device. Figure 27
NOTE: If machine is only equipped with a travel
alarm device, the alarm will not sound
when swinging although the switch is in
the "II" position.
18. Overload Warning Switch (Optional)

If unit is equipped with an overload warning device, push O
this switch to activate it.
O. In this position, the overload warning device is turned I
"OFF".
I. In this position, when a load is lifted that reaches the
machine safe lifting limit, a warning light on the
instrument panel will turn "ON" and a warning buzzer
will sound.
FG000032
Figure 28
WARNING
To prevent injury, do not exceed the rated load
capacity of the machine. If the machine is not on level
ground, load capacities will vary. There may be local
government regulations about the use of excavators
for lifting objects.
Please observe these regulations.

2-15
19. Fuel Heater Switch (Optional)
This switch is used to activate the fuel heater system. O
When the switch is activated, the fuel is warmed,
depending upon the temperature of the fuel. I
NOTE: If the fuel temperature is above 5°C (41°F),
heating system is not activated.
O. In this position, the fuel heater system is turned
"OFF".
I. In this position, the fuel heater system is turned "ON". FG000033
Figure 29
NOTE: The starter switch must be "ON".
20. Seat Warmer Switch (Optional)

If the seat is equipped with the optional seat warmer, push O
this switch to activate it.
When the seat is warmed, the warmer is automatically I
turned "OFF".
O. In this position, the seat warmer is turned "OFF".
I. In this position, the seat warmer is turned "ON".
NOTE: The starter switch must be "ON" with the engine
FG000034
running, for the heater to operate.
Figure 30
21. Horn Button (Left-hand Work Lever)

Press the lower button on the top of the left-hand work
lever (joystick) to sound horn.
NOTE: The starter switch must be "ON".
FG002084
Figure 31

2-16
22. Rotating Buttons
For a machine equipped with an attachment that rotates,
press the upper two buttons on the top of the left-hand
work lever (joystick) to rotate the attachment clockwise or
counterclockwise. Left button is for counterclockwise and
the right one is for clockwise.
WARNING
FG000382
Before using any attachment in a work application, be Figure 32
23. Booster Button (Right-hand Work

Lever)
Press the lower button on the top of the right-hand work
lever (joystick) to boost the hydraulic pressure. Refer to the
“Boost Mode” on page 3-21.
NOTE: This button works with the breaker/boost/shear
selector switch. See “9. Breaker / Boost / Shear
Selector Switch” on page 2-12.
FG000036
Figure 33
24. Shear Buttons

For a machine equipped with shear, press the two upper
buttons on the top of the right-hand work lever (joystick) to
open or close the shear. Left button is for closing (crowd),
right button is for opening (Dump).
NOTE: These buttons work with the breaker/boost/
shear selector switch. See “9. Breaker / Boost /
Shear Selector Switch” on page 2-12.
FG000383
WARNING Figure 34
Before using any attachment in a work application, be


2-17
25. Instrument Panel
See “Instrument Panel” on page 2-20.
E F
C H C H
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
FG013662
Figure 35
26. Safety Lever

See “Safety Lever” on page 3-13.
FG000038
Figure 36
27. Photo Sensor

The photo sensor detects the radiant energy of the sun.
In auto mode the air conditioner will automatically adjust
the air temperature based on to the detected radiant
energy.
FG000399
Figure 37

2-18
28. Liftting mode switch
This switch is used to work the liftting pipes or heams. O
O. In this position, "STD" work mode is selected.
I. In this position, "Liftting" working moce is selected.
I
FG015772
Figure 38
29. Manual Operating Switch of Auto

Greasing Device O
This switch is used to operate the auto greasing device
manually. I
O. In this position, the auto greasing device is operated
for about six minutes every one hour.
If auto greasing device is needed to be operated
manually, please press this switch to "I" position.
FG015773
I. In this position, the auto greasing device starts
Figure 39
greasing, and it lasts about six minutes.
This switch will be returned to "O" position
automatically when it is released.

2-19
INSTRUMENT PANEL
7 8 9 10 11 12 5
6 1
1 CHECK
E
< CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL NO.>
F 4
16
C H C H 18
AMP 040 28P
14 20 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
22 12 11 10 9 8 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
13 (CN7) (CN6)
1 2 3 4 5
23
6 7 8 9 0
15
17 19 21 FG013521
Figure 40

2-20
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Fuel Gauge Power Mode Selector Button
14
Engine Coolant Temperature (See page 2-33)
2
Gauge Economy Mode Selector Button
15
Hydraulic Oil Temperature (See page 2-33)
3
Gauge Auto Idle Selector Button
16
Multifunction Gauge And Graphic (See page 2-34)
4 Information Area (See page Flow Control Button
17
2-27) (See page 2-34)
5 Digital Clock Up Arrow Button
18
6 Hour Meter (See page 2-35)
7 Charge Warning Down Arrow Button
19
(See page 2-36)
8 Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Display Selector Button
Engine Coolant Temperature 20
9 (See page 2-36)
Warning
Selection Button
10 Engine Check Warning 21
(See page 2-36)
11 Preheat Indicator
22 Home Selector Button
12 Work Light Indicator
13 Warning Light
Functional check
When the engine starter switch is turned to the "I" (ON) position,
all gauge bands, switch/button indicator lights and indicator/
warning lights will turn "ON" and the alarm buzzer will sound
about two seconds.
During this functional check, a LOGO will appear on the multi
function gauge in the graphic information area (3 and 4, Figure
40).
Password Activated
If a password has already been set and the system has been
"LOCKED", the password display will appear on the screen once
the functional check has been completed. Enter the password
into the text area and then engage the starter.
NOTE: Refer to “Set Password (Lock and Unlock)” on
page 2-42, for further details.
CAUTION
If the password does not match the stored password, the
engine will not start.

2-21
1. Fuel Gauge
Shows remaining fuel quantity in tank.
BLUE ZONE ( ) - Indicates a normal fuel quantity.
RED ZONE ( ) - Indicates that the fuel level is low.

If the gauge pointer moves into the red zone, the fuel level
symbol will turn "ON", and be display in the screen. Stop E F
operation and immediately and add fuel.
NOTE: See “Abnormal State Warning Symbols” on FG013666
page 2-29, for location of this warning symbol Figure 41
and others.
Check the fuel level on firm, level ground.
2. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge

The colored bands indicate the temperature of the engine
coolant.
WHITE ZONE ( ) - Indicates temperature is lower than

the normal operating temperature.
BLUE ZONE ( ) - Indicates temperature is within the C H

normal operating range.
RED ZONE ( ) - Indicates temperature is too high. FG013672

Figure 42
During operation, the pointer must be in the blue zone.
If the gauge pointer moves into the red zone, the engine
coolant temperature warning light will turn "ON", a warning
buzzer will sound, and the engine speed will be
automatically reduced. Allow the engine to run at low idle
speed until the temperature gauge registers in the blue
zone again. When the blue zone is reached, allow the
engine to idle for an additional three - five minutes before
shutting down the engine. If not allowed to idle, heat surge
may develop which will damage the engine. Allowing the
engine to idle will dissipate heat. Check the coolant level,
look for a loose fan belt, inspect for debris around radiator,
and so on.
When the temperature reaches the normal range, the
engine speed will automatically recover.

2-22
3. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge
The colored bands indicate the temperature of the
hydraulic oil
WHITE ZONE ( ) - Indicates temperature is lower than

the normal operating temperature.
BLUE ZONE ( ) - Indicates temperature is within the C H

normal operating range.
RED ZONE ( ) - Indicates temperature is too high. FG013673

Figure 43
During operation, the pointer must be in the blue zone.
If the gauge pointer moves into the red zone, the hydraulic
oil temperature symbol will turn "ON", and be display in the
screen. Allow the engine to run at low idle speed until the
temperature gauge registers in the blue zone again.
NOTE: See “Abnormal State Warning Symbols” on
page 2-29, for location of this warning symbol
and others.
4. Multifunction Gauge and Graphic

Information Area
See “Multifunction Gauge and Graphic Information” on
page 2-27. This section will have a more in-depth
explanation of the display area.
E F
C H C H
FG013591
Figure 44
5. Digital Clock
A digital clock, shows the current time. The displayed
contents are as follows.
Display Description
MM Month
MM/DD [W] HH:mm
DD Date
W Day
HH Hour
FG000044
mm Minute
Figure 45
A (P) AM (PM)
Refer to the “Setting Main Menu” on page 2-35 for time

setting.

2-23
6. Hour Meter
The hour meter is used to indicate the total number of
running hours on the engine. The meter will flash every
four seconds when the engine is running to indicate that it
is functioning properly.
HAOA601L
Figure 46
7. Charge Warning Light

This indicator light will turn "ON" when the engine starter
switch is turned "ON", and should go "OFF" after the
engine starts. If it does not turn "OFF", shut the engine
down immediately and determine the cause of the
problem.
HAOA610L
Figure 47
8. Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light

This indicator light will turn "ON" when the engine starter
switch is turned "ON", and should go "OFF" after the
engine starts. For example, if the engine oil pressure
becomes too low, the light will turn "ON" and a warning
buzzer will sound. If this happens, shut the engine down
immediately and determine the cause of the problem. If
you continue to work when this light is "ON", it will result in
serious engine damage.
HAOA620L
Figure 48
CAUTION
If you continue to work when this light is "ON", it will
result in serious engine damage.

2-24
9. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Light
If engine coolant overheats, this light will turn "ON", an
alarm will sound, and the engine speed will be
automatically reduced, until coolant temperature drops. Do
not turn engine "OFF" because this will cause coolant
temperature to rise and may cause engine to siege due to
heat surge.
NOTE: Check the engine coolant temperature gauge. If
HAOD350L
the gauge pointer moves into the red zone, the
engine coolant temperature warning light will Figure 49
turn "ON", a warning buzzer will sound, and the
engine speed will be automatically reduced.
Allow the engine to run at low idle speed until
the temperature gauge registers in the blue
zone again. When the blue zone is reached,
allow the engine to idle for an additional three -
five minutes before shutting down the engine. If
not allowed to idle, heat surge may develop
which will damage the engine. Allowing the
engine to idle will dissipate heat. Check the
coolant level, look for a loose fan belt, inspect
for debris around radiator, and so on.
When the temperature reaches the normal
range, the engine speed will automatically
recover.
10. Engine Check Warning Light

This indicator light will turn "ON", when the engine needs to
be check.
NOTE: If this light turns "ON" stop the machine and
repair the cause of the fault. CHECK
FG000045
Figure 50

2-25
11. Preheating Indicator Light
In cold weather this light indicates that the engine preheat
function is operating.
When this indicator light turns "OFF", it means that the
engine preheat cycle has been completed.
HAAE2000
Figure 51
12. Work Light Indicator Light

The indicator light indicates that the work lights are turned
"ON".
HB4O2003
Figure 52

2-26
MULTIFUNCTION GAUGE AND
GRAPHIC INFORMATION
When the engine starter switch is turned to the "I" (ON) position,
a LOGO will appear on the display screen for about two
seconds.
When the LOGO disappears, the multifunction gauge and
graphic information screen will appear.
The engine rpm is normally displayed at the bottom of the
screen when the starter switch is first turned "ON". Each time the E F
display selector button (19, Figure 40) is pressed, the digital C H C H
readout changes in the following sequence; Engine speed
(RPM) -> Battery voltage (VOLT) -> Front pump pressure (BAR) FG013591
-> Rear pump pressure (BAR). Figure 53
NOTE: See Figure 56 thru Figure 59.
A digital clock is located at the top of the display.
By using a combination of the mode selector buttons,
information for filters and oils can also be displayed.
The display can also be set for the desired language.
Refer to the “Setting Main Menu” on page 2-35 for the language
selection and information display sequences.
Communication Indicator
Indicates the condition of communication between main
controller and instrument panel.
1. Normal Condition:
The symbol will sequentially move like lightening.
NOTE: See Figure 56 thru Figure 59.
2. Abnormal Condition:
If the symbol is not displayed, it means there is a FG000047
communication error. Figure 54
NOTE: See Figure 55.

2-27
Communication Error Warning
If a communication error is generated between e-EPOS
controller and instrument panel, this symbol will be displayed.
When this symbol is displayed, contact a DOOSAN distributor or
sales agency.
NOTE: If a communication error occurs during operation, the
last mode setting is stored. e.g. power mode, work
mode and auto idle are stored during failure.
NOTE: When starter switch is turned to the "I" (ON) position FG000048
during a state of communication error failure, the Figure 55
e-EPOS controller will default to the following modes.
Power mode: Standard mode
Working mode: Digging mode
Auto idle: "ON" (Selection state)
Engine Speed
The engine speed is numerically displayed.
E/G SPEED 1700 RPM
FG000049
Figure 56
Battery Voltage
The battery voltage is numerically displayed. With the engine
running, the reading should be between 26V - 30V.
When the starter is engaged or the preheat system is being
used, the voltage can temporarily drop below 24V, but this is a BATTERY 28.0 VOLT
normal condition.
FG000050
Figure 57

2-28
Front Hydraulic Pump Pressure
The front pump pressure is numerically displayed.
NOTE: This pump is closest to engine flywheel housing
or is the upper one of hydraulic pump.
It displays the reading in bars.
FRONT PUMP 320 BAR
FG000051
Figure 58
Rear Hydraulic Pump Pressure

The rear pump pressure is numerically displayed.
NOTE: This pump is the farthest from engine flywheel
housing or is the lower one of hydraulic pump.
It displays the reading in bars.
REAR PUMP 313 BAR
FG000052
Figure 59
Abnormal State Warning Symbols 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1. Hydraulic Oil Overheating Warning
2. Pilot Filter Clogged Warning
3. Fuel Shortage Warning
4. Return Filter Clogged Warning
5. Air Cleaner Clogged Warning
6. Overload Warning (Optional)
FG013702
7. Water in Fuel Warning
Figure 60

2-29
Examples of Warning Display
FG013703 FG013704 FG013705
<2 kinds of warning display> <4 kinds of warning display> <7 kinds of warning display>
Figure 61
1. Hydraulic Oil Overheat Warning

If the hydraulic oil temperature is too high, this symbol
appears on the screen.
FG000056
Figure 62
2. Pilot Filter Clogged Warning

This symbol indicates when the pilot filter clogged.
If this symbol is displayed, immediately stop operation and
replace the pilot filter.
After the pilot filter has been serviced, restart machine
operation to remove the warning symbol.
FG000055
Figure 63

2-30
3. Fuel Shortage Warning
If the fuel quantity is too low, this symbol appears on the
screen.
If this light turns "ON", add fuel as soon as possible.
FG000057
Figure 64
4. Return Filter Clogged Warning

This symbol indicates when the hydraulic return filter is
clogged.
replace the return filter.
After the return filter has been serviced, restart machine
FG000054
Figure 65
5. Air Cleaner Clogged Warning

This symbol indicates when the air cleaner is clogged.
replace or clean the air filter.
After the air filter has been serviced, restart machine
FG000053
Figure 66

2-31
6. Overload Warning (Optional)
If the overload warning switch is turned "ON", and this
symbol appears on the screen and the warning buzzer
sounds, that indicates that overloaded condition is
occurring. Immediately reduce the load.
WARNING
If this warning appears on the screen and a warning
FG000253
buzzer sound, reduce the load immediately.
Figure 67
If you continue to work, the machine can be turned
over or damage to hydraulic components and
structural parts could occur.
7. Water In Fuel Warning

This symbol indicates when the water is full in the fuel
prefilter
When this symbol appears drain the water from the fuel
prefilter as soon as possible.
FG013744
Figure 68

2-32
MODE SELECTOR BUTTONS
1 3
1. Power Mode Selector Button
2. Trenching Mode Selector Button
1 2 3 4 5
3. Auto Idle Selector Button
4. Flow Control Button
6 7 8 9 0
2 4
FG013707
Figure 69
1. Power Mode Selector Button

This power mode is suitable for heavy-duty work that
requires a high operating speed. Push this button to turn
power mode "ON" or "OFF".
When the power mode button is pushed to the "ON"
position, an indicator light above it turns "ON". 1
When the power mode button is pushed again, it is turned
"OFF" and the power mode is deactivated and returns to
the standard operating mode. FG013709
When turning the engine starter switch to the "I" (ON) Figure 70
position, the power mode is automatically defaulted to
"Standard Mode".
NOTE: For further details, see “Mode Selection” on
page 3-19.
2. Economy Mode Selector Button

Economy mode is used for light loading work, when this
mode selected it will reduce noise and fuel consumption
with standard mode.
When the economy mode button is pushed to the "ON"
position, a symbol appears on the screen.
6
NOTE: When the economy mode button is pushed
again, it is turned "OFF" and the economy mode
is deactivated and returns to the standard FG013710
operating mode.
Figure 71

2-33
3. Auto Idle Selector Button
When the auto idle system is activated, the engine will
automatically reduce speed to "IDLE" approximately four
seconds after all of the control levers are in the neutral
position. This system is designed to reduce fuel
consumption and noise.
2
When the auto idle selector button is pushed to the "ON"
position, an indicator light above it turns "ON".
When the auto idle selector button is pushed again, it is FG013711
turned "OFF" and the engine speed will return to the
Figure 72
setting of the engine speed dial and will remain at this
speed despite control lever position, until the engine speed
dial is moved.
4. Flow Control Button

When the button is pushed, you can control the hydraulic
oil flow rate.
The flow control button is used to set the flow rate of pump
to match the installed tool/attachment for optimal
performance, without damaging it.
7
NOTE: For further details, see “Flow Control” on
page 2-44.
FG013896
Figure 73

2-34
SETTING MAIN MENU
By using a combination of the selector buttons (Figure 75), you
can review and set the contents of the display screen. Items
such as language, time and filter/oil information can be checked,
and if necessary, set with new information.
E F
C H C H
FG013591
Figure 74
1 3 5
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
2 4
FG013712
Figure 75
1. Up Arrow Button
Up arrow button ( ), is used to move a menu item "Up" or
to the "Left".
FG000068
Figure 76

2-35
2. Down Arrow Button
Down arrow button ( ), is used to move a menu item
"Down" or to the "Right".
FG000069
Figure 77
3. Display Selector Button (ESC - Escape)

Display selector button ( ), is used to change the
displayed information on the screen. Each time the display
selector button is pressed, the digital readout changes.
NOTE: When setting the main menu, this button is used
as the menu / exit button (ESC). To access the
menus the button must be pressed and held for 4
three seconds.
NOTE: When this button is used for menu / exit button,
it is used to access to main menu or return to a FG000070
previous screen from each submenu. Figure 78
4. Selection Button
Selection button ( ), is used to set a menu or clear the
operating hour of filter/oil.
FG000071
Figure 79
5. Home Button
Home button (HOME), is used to access to the default
screen from each submenu.
FG013713
Figure 80

2-36
Display Selection and Escaping
Display Selection
When the display button (Figure 81) is pressed for more than
three seconds, the main menu screen (Figure 83) is displayed.
In the normal display screen, the engine speed (rpm), battery
voltage (volt), front pump pressure (bar), and rear pump
pressure (bar) can be displayed.
4
FG000070
Figure 81
ESC Button
The screen will return from the main menu to the normal display
screen, by again pressing the "ESC" ( ) button.
NOTE: If more than twenty seconds are spent in any menu,
without changing the screen, it will return to the
normal display screen.
E F
C H C H
FG013591
Figure 82
Main Menu
MAIN MENU
The menu selection can be changed by pressing the "UP" ( )
L 1. Language
or "DOWN" ( ) buttons. The selected menu item will be l
2. Set Clock
l
highlighted, and a cursor will appear by the menu item.

3. Filter / Oil Info
When the selected menu item is highlighted, press the
"SELECT" ( ) button to enter the next submenu.
4. Adjust Display
5. Set Password
1. “Language” on page 2-38.
: UP : DOWN : SELECT
2. “Set Clock” on page 2-38.
FG013563
3. “Filter / Oil Info” on page 2-39. Figure 83
4. “Adjust Display” on page 2-41
5. “Set Password (Lock and Unlock)” on page 2-42

2-37
Language
L Languag
When the cursor is on "Language", press the "SELECT" ( )
button. The language submenu will appear. 1. Korean
The desired language can be selected by using the "UP" ( ) or 2. English

"DOWN"( ) buttons.
The display can be set for the desired language.
Press the "SELECT" ( ) button to set the selected language. : UP : DOWN : SET
NOTE: If more than twenty seconds are spent in the menu, FG013564
without changing the screen, it will return to the Figure 84
Set Clock
MAIN MENU
When the cursor is on "Set Clock", press the "SELECT" ( )
button. The set clock submenu will appear.
L 1. Language
l
2. Set Clock
l
NOTE: If more than twenty seconds are spent in the menu,
normal display screen. 4. Adjust Display
5. Set Password
FG013565
Figure 85
Setting Method
1. Move the cursor to desired number by using the "SELECT" SET CLOCK
( ) button. When selected the number will flash.
2. Set the time by using the "UP" ( ) or "DOWN"( ) 02:30:30

buttons.
2003 11/04
• "+" ( ), "-" ( ): Increase or decrease number.
• "MOVE" ( ): Confirm and move the cursor to next
number. : UP : DOWN : SELECT
FG013566
• "ESC" ( ): Exit to the main menu. Figure 86

2-38
'00' Minute Setting
SET CLOCK
1. Simultaneously press the "SELECT" ( ) button and "UP"
( ) button.
2. If the displayed time is 30 minutes or less, the clock will 02:30:30
display the preceding hour.
2003 11/04
3. If the displayed time is more than 30 minutes, the clock will
display the succeeding hour.
4. When the preceding hour is more than 23, the day will be : UP : DOWN : SELECT
increased. FG013566
Figure 87
Filter / Oil Info

MAIN MENU
When the cursor is on "Filter/Oil Info", press the "SELECT" ( )
button. The filter/oil information submenu will appear.
L 1. Language
l
2. Set Clock
l
4. Adjust Display
5. Set Password
FG013567
Figure 88
Each symbol can be selected by pressing the "UP" ( ) or

"DOWN" ( ) buttons. At the bottom of the screen the operating Filter/Oil Information
hour (Hrs) of each filter and/or oil is displayed. R
1. Fuel Filter
Hrs : 0045Hrs 42m
FG013568
Figure 89

2-39
Menu Display Order and Icon Explanation
1. Fuel Filter 2. Air Cleaner 3. Engine Oil Filter 4. Hyd. Oil Filter
5. Pilot Filter 6. Engine Oil 7. Hydraulic Oil 8. Coolant Water

FG001358
Figure 90
Filter / Oils Operating Hour Reset

After changing a filter or oil, reset the operating hour to zero Filter/Oil Information
(Hrs: 0000). The next replacement period can than be easily R
checked. The operating hours are only accumulated while the
engine is running. P
On the filter / oil information screen, press the "SELECT" ( )
button and then the reset screen will be displayed. RESET?
YES : NO : ESC
On the reset screen, the operating hour can be changed to zero
hour (Hrs: 0000) by pressing the "SELECT" ( ).
FG013716
If the "SELECT" ( ) button is pressed, the reset will be Figure 91
completed. and the screen will be returned to the previous
menu.
If the "ESC" ( ) button is pressed, the screen will be returned

to the previous menu without being reset.
NOTE: If more than twenty seconds are spent in the menu,
The screen is returned to the main menu by pressing the "ESC"
( ) button.

2-40
Adjust Display
MAIN MENU
When the cursor is on "Adjust Display", press the "SELECT"
( ) button. The adjust display submenu will appear.
L 1. Language
l
2. Set Clock
l
4. Adjust Display
5. Set Password
FG013569
Figure 92
The desired brightness adjustment can be selected by using

"UP" ( ) or "DOWN" ( ) buttons.
NOTE: When the equipment shipped, the default brightness
is set to 50%. 1. Adjust Display
The screen is returned to the main menu by pressing the "ESC"
( ) button. The display is then saved. 2. Adjust Display (Camera)
FG013835
Figure 93
1. Move the cursor to desired characteristic about display by

using the "SELECT" ( ) button. Adjust Display
2. The desired brightness, contrast, backlight adjustment can
Brightness l llllllllllllllllllllllll l 50%
l
be selected by using "UP" ( ) or "DOWN" ( ) buttons.
Contrast lllllllllllllllllllllllll l 50%
l
l
NOTE: When the equipment shipped and it is daymode ( ),
the default brightness and contrast is set to 50%, the
Back Light llllllllllllllllllllllll l 50%
l
l
default backlight is set to 90%.
When it is night mode ( ), the default brightness is : UP : DOWN : SELECT

set to 50%, the default contrast is set to 30%, the FG013570
default backlight is set to 10%. Figure 94
Default value of camera display is 50% (brightness),
50% (contrast), 90% (backlight).
The screen is return to the previous menu by pressing the "ESC"
( ) button. The display is then saved.

2-41
Set Password (Lock and Unlock)
Use extreme care when setting the password for starting the
engine. If a mistake is made when entering the number, and the
number is excepted by the system, as being correct, that
number will be the only one that will allow the security system to
be activated or deactivated.
Write your password down and keep it in a safe location.
Password numbers can only use numbers between 1 and 8. The

small number to the lower left of each button on the instrument
panel, indicates the number that will be entered when that button
is pressed. Numbers "0" and "9" are invalid choices.
Example: C H
E F
C H
2785 is acceptable.
9024 is not acceptable.
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
FG013662
Figure 95
When the cursor is on "Set Password" press the "SELECT"

( ) button. The set password submenu will appear. MAIN MENU
NOTE: The screen can be returned to the main menu by L 1. Language
pressing the "ESC"( ) button (3, Figure 75). l
l
2. Set Clock
4. Adjust Display
5. Set Password
FG013571
Figure 96
Password inquiry menu will be displayed.

NOTE: The initial password is "1111".
The password can be changed within ten minutes while the
ENTER
starter switch is in "I" (ON) position.
PASSWORD
After changing password, be sure to use the changed password.
CAUTION
FG013717
Failure to enter correct password three times, will return
normal display screen, and another attempt will not be Figure 97
possible for ten minutes.
A three item menu will be displayed. The items are "LOCK",

"UNLOCK", and "CHANGE PASSWORD". An item can be
selected by using the "UP" ( ) or "DOWN" ( ) buttons, and
then selected by pressing the "SELECT" ( ) button.

2-42
Press "ESC" ( ) button (3, Figure 75) for 1 more second, it
returns to main menu.
According to the selection of adoption (lock) or non-adoption
(unlock), the password function will be in working or non- Set Password
working.
When you want to change a password, follow below procedure. Lock
1. Move the cursor to "Change Password". Unlock
2. Input desired 4 digits password using selection buttons (at
the first column). Input the same password one more time
Change Password
(at the second column)
3. Select adoption (lock) or non-adoption (unlock) at set
FG013718
password menu.
Figure 98
NOTE: Keep in mind never to forget password.
NOTE: Please contact a DOOSAN distributor, if you
forget your password.

2-43
FLOW CONTROL
The flow control is used to set the proper flow rate for an
optional attachment (If equipped). The flow control screen is
accessed directly from the normal display screen without going
through the main menu or any submenus.
E F
C H C H
FG013591
Figure 99
When the flow control button (Figure 73 and Figure 100) is

pressed at the normal display screen (Figure 99), the flow
control screen (Figure 102) will be displayed.
FG013896
Figure 100
Select a tool by using the breaker / boost / shear selector switch.

The symbol in the upper left corner of the display screen will
change according to the position that the selector switch is in. I
Compare the symbols shown in (Figure 102 and Figure 103). O
II P
RU
WE
PO
FG000025
Figure 101

2-44
Adjusting Flow Rate
FLOW CONTROL
Use "UP" ( ) or "DOWN" ( ) buttons to adjust flow rate.
"UP" ( ) button is used to increase a flow rate.

"DOWN" ( ) button is used to decrease a flow rate.
Flow Control Step Pump Flow Setting (l/min)

1 130
: APPLY ESC: CANCEL
2 160
FG014885
3 190
Figure 102 Breaker
4 220
5 250
6 280
7 310
8 340
9 350
10 350
Pump flow setting is at rated engine speed, for only the output of
one pump. FLOW CONTROL
Pump displacement will vary according to changes in engine
rpm.
: APPLY ESC: CANCEL

FG014886
Figure 103 Shear
Escape
FLOW CONTROL
A. Press flow control button ( , Figure 100) to return to
normal display screen and save the flow rate setting.
B. If there is no adjustment for twenty seconds, the flow
control screen will return to the normal display screen.
: APPLY ESC: CANCEL

FG014885
Figure 104

2-45
OPERATION SELECTION
DISPLAY
In the monitor you can see the application that is currently
selected.
Power Mode Selection
PWR
FG013720
Figure 105
Standard Mode Selection
STD
FG013721
Figure 106
Economy Mode Selection
ECO
FG013722
Figure 107

2-46
Auto Idle Selection
PWR
AUTO
FG013723
Figure 108
Power Boost Selection
PWR
FG013724
Figure 109
Breaker Selection
PWR
FG013725
Figure 110
Shear Selection
PWR
FG013726
Figure 111

2-47
Quick Clamp Operation Selection
(Optional)
PWR
FG013728
Figure 112
Camera Mode Selector Button
Camera mode selector button (optional)

Push this button (1, Figure 113) to turn camera mode "ON" or
"OFF".
When the camera mode button is pushed to the "ON" position,
the camera window appears on the screen. 1 2 3 4 5
When the camera mode button is pushed again, it is turned

"OFF" and the camera mode is deactivated and return to the 6 7 8 9 0
default screen. 1
FG013836
Figure 113

2-48
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
CONTROL PANEL
Location of Controls and Vents
FG013837
Figure 114
The heater and air conditioner are combined into one unit in the
rear cover behind the operator's seat.
The operator can control cabin temperature using the control
panel installed in the switch panel.

2-49
Control Panel
1 3 10 7 8
A/C OUTSIDE
AUTO A/C
AUTO MAX
TEMP
OFF
SEL MODE
2 4 5 6 9
FG000086
Figure 115
Reference Reference
Number Number
Automatic Temperature Control 6 Air Inlet Selector Button
1
Button 7 Fan Speed Selector Button
2 Off Button 8 Air Conditioner Button
3 Temperature Control Button 9 Defroster Button
Temperature Unit Selector 10 LCD Display
4
Button
5 Air Outlet Selector Button
NOTE: When the light switch is turned to "I" or "II" position,

the LED for illuminating in the control panel will turn
"ON".
1. Automatic Temperature Control Button

This button is used to control the temperature level in the
cabin, according to the temperature setting of the operating
panel.
When the automatic temperature control function is
activated, the word "AUTO" will be displayed in the upper AUTO
left of LCD display.
When the system is in "AUTO" mode, specifications can be
manually changed by pushing another button.
FG000088
If a function is manually changed, the word "AUTO" does
not appear in the LCD display, but the unchanged Figure 116
functions will remain in "AUTO" mode.

2-50
2. Off Button
This button is used to stop the fan and air conditioner.
OFF
FG000089
Figure 117
3. Temperature Control Button

These buttons are used to control the cabin temperature.
Temperature is adjustable from 17°C (62°F) to 32°C (90°F)
by 0.5°C (1°F) increments.
Temperature setting is displayed on the LCD. TEMP
When the system is turned "ON", the previously set
temperature is used as a starting point.
FG000090
Figure 118
4. Temperature Unit Selector Button

This button gives the choice to select either °C or °F.
SEL
FG000094
Figure 119

2-51
5. Mode Selector Button
This button is used to select which combination air outlets
will be used.
MODE
FG000096
Figure 120
A. Used to direct air flow to upper portion of operator's

cabin from both the front and rear.
FG000099
Figure 121
B. Used to direct air flow to upper portion of operator's

cabin from both the front and rear. It will also deliver
air to the lower portion of operator's cabin from under
the operator's seat.
FG000097
Figure 122
C. Used to direct air flow to lower portion of operator's

cabin and feet.
This mode is mainly used for heating.
FG000100
Figure 123

2-52
D. Used to direct air flow to the front window and to
operator's feet.
FG000098
Figure 124
6. Air Inlet Selector Button

This button is used to select fresh air from outside the
cabin, or recirculate air within the cabin.
Pressing this switch enables the choice between fresh air
and recirculating air within the operator's compartment.
The select mode is displayed on the LCD.
FG000101
Figure 125
A. "A" Symbol - Draws fresh air into operator's

compartment. Used to exchange air within the
operator's compartment with fresh air. Used to
remove condensation or ice on window (Winter /
Rainy Season).
A B
B. "B" Symbol - Recirculates air within the operator's
compartment. Used to quickly warm or cool the
operator's cabin.
FG000102
Figure 126
7. Fan Speed Selector Buttons

These buttons are used to control the speed of the blower
fan.
Momentarily, pressing a button, changes the speed one
stage.
Continuously pressing and holding a button, repeatedly
changes the speed.
FG000103
Figure 127

2-53
8. Air Conditioner Button
This button is used to turn the air conditioner "ON" or
"OFF".
When this function is activated, an "A/C" is displayed in the
upper left corner of the LCD.
A/C
FG000105
Figure 128
9. Defroster Button
Used to direct air flow to front window.
FG000106
Figure 129
10. LCD Display

This display shows the current setting.
A/C OUTSIDE
Memory Function AUTO MAX
The air conditioner panel has a memory function. When the

starter switch is turned "OFF" the settings for the panel, will be
stored. When the excavator is started, the last stored setting will
be used.
FG000107
Figure 130
Additional Operating Instructions

A proper indoor temperature in summer is 5 - 6°C (10 - 12°F)
less than the outdoor temperature.
Operate the air conditioner for twenty - thirty minutes a week to
circulate the refrigerant in the system.
NOTE: The blower button should be on "Three Bars".
If operating the air conditioner or heater for a long time, operate
the air inlet selector button, and when smoking, vent the air to
the outside to prevent irritation to eyes.

2-54
STEREO
Before operating the stereo or CD player, read operation manual
enclosed with stereo.
Stereo
2 3 7 9 8 5
PROGRAM
AST
SOUND AM/FM SCAN
N-
OFF 1 2 3
VO M
USH O
LU
E TUNE
P
4 5 6
1 4 10 6
FG000108
Figure 131
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Power / Volume Control 6 Preset Station
2 Sound Mode Selector 7 Tape Ejection
3 Band Selection 8 Fast Forward / Rewind
4 Tuning Up / Down 9 Tape Loading Slot
5 Scan Function / Auto Store 10 LCD
CD Player (Optional)
AST/DIR
FG000109
Figure 132

2-55
MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL
DEVICES
Cabin Light
A light is installed on the top of the operator's compartment.
The light will work despite starter switch position.
NOTE: If light is left "ON" for a long time while the engine is
not running, the battery will be discharged.
FG000417
Figure 133
Pilot Cutoff Switch

When the safety lever is put into the "LOCK" position, the switch
deactivates the work and travel levers. With the work and travel
levers deactivated, no digging/operational work can be done.
FG000211
Figure 134
Circuit Breaker
A main circuit breaker is in the battery box. It will automatically
cut off in case of an electrical short circuit or overload. This will
prevent the electric wiring and components from being burned or
damaged.
If the circuit breaker is cut off, check all related circuits, this
means something is wrong in the electric circuit.
After maintenance, press the red button for normal operation of
circuit breaker.
HAOB090L
Figure 135

2-56
Fusible Link
A fusible link is in the battery box.
If the engine does not crank, first check that the starter switch is A
turned "ON" and that no power is available (No indicator lights
will light.). Check that the "A" portion (Figure 136) of the fusible
link is not broken or burned through. Replace the fusible link if
damage and investigate cause.
WARNING Figure 136

HAOB100L
When changing the fusible link, replace the fusible link with
the same capacity part. Otherwise, a fire could break out in
the wiring harness and/or other components of the circuit.
Always use original DOOSAN parts.
Fuse Boxes
There are two fuse boxes (Figure 137) on the left side of the
heater box. The fuses prevent electrical devices from
overloading or shorting.
A decal attached to the inside of the fuse box access cover
indicates the function and amperage of each fuse.
NOTE: For a further explanation see “Fuse Boxes” on
page 4-77.
Spare fuses are mounted on the inside of fuse box access FG000110
cover. Figure 137
Change a fuse if the element separates. If the element of a new
fuse separates, check the circuit and repair the circuit.
CAUTION
Always replace fuses with the same type and capacity fuse
that was removed. Otherwise, electrical damage could
result.

2-57
SEAT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Adjust the seat position before starting operations or after
changing the operator.
Always fasten your seat belt while operating machine.
Adjust the seat so that the control levers and pedals can be
operated freely and easily with the operator back against
the backrest.
1. Forward / Backward Adjustment

Holding lever (1, Figure 138), raise it up, move the seat to
the desired position. Release lever to lock the seat in the
selected position. Adjustment range is 200 mm (7.9 in).
2. Seat Tilt and Height Adjustment 4 2
1
Forward Tilt 3 FG000183
Push lever (2, Figure 138) down to adjust the angle of the Figure 138
front of the seat. There are four positions that it can be set
at.
Rear Tilt
Pull lever (2, Figure 138) up to adjust the angle of the rear
of the seat. There are four positions that it can be set at.
Seat Height
It is possible to move the seat up or down by combining
adjustments forward and rear tilt. Adjust the seat according
to operator's size and work conditions. Height adjustment
is 60 mm (2.4 in).
3. Suspension Adjustment
Turning knob (3, Figure 138) to right makes the
suspension harder. Turning knob to left makes the
suspension softer. Adjust according to operator's weight by
checking the weight indicator dial. Adjustment range is
from 50 - 120 kg (110 - 265 lb).

2-58
4. Reclining Position Adjustment
Pulling up the right lever (4,Figure 138) allows the seat
backrest to be moved forward or backward.
Sit with your back against the seat back when adjusting it.
If your back is not touching the seat back, the seat back
may suddenly move forward.
5. Armrest Angle Adjustment

The angle of each armrest can be adjusted by turning a 7
dial (5, Figure 139) on bottom of armrest. When adjusting
the angle, manually raise the armrest before turning the 9
dial.
5
8
6. Lumbar Support Adjustment 6
A lumbar support is located in the seat back.

Turn the dial (6, Figure 139) counterclockwise to increase
the force of the lumbar support FG000778
Figure 139
7. Headrest
The headrest (7, Figure 139) can be adjusted forward/
backward and up/down. Move it by holding both sides.

2-59
8. Seat Belt
WARNING
The seat belt is for the operator's safety and should
always be worn. Before driving the machine, adjust the
seat to the desired position for maximum comfort and
machine control, then fasten the seat belt. Seat belts
must be worn across the pelvic region and adjusted
snugly to lessen the chance and severity of injury in
case of an accident. Never fasten a seat belt across the
abdomen.
Under no circumstances should the operator be
standing in the cabin when operating the excavator.
Do not adjust the seat position while the vehicle is
moving because a loss of control may result. Stop the
machine, apply the parking brake, and then adjust the
seat.
Always, check the condition of seat belt and belt
bracket before fastening it. Do not use it with twists in
it. Replace belt or bracket if damaged or worn.
Seat Belt Locking and Unlocking

Insert belt end (1, Figure 140) into the buckle (2). Pull the
belt to check that belt end is locked into buckle.
Adjust belt length so that it comfortably tight against the
operator's pelvic region (hipbone).
HAOB140L
Figure 140
Press the button (3, Figure 141) in the center of buckle (2)
and pull out belt (1) to unlock.
HAOB150L
Figure 141

2-60
9. Seat Back-pocket
The seat has a seat back pocket. It is used for storing the
operation and maintenance manual.
10. Left and Right Control Stand

Adjustment
For operator's convenience, the right and left control
stands and seat can slide together, within a 160 mm
(6.3 in) forward or backward travel distance.
Holding lever (10, Figure 142), raise it up, set the seat to 11
desired position. Release lever to lock the seat in the
selected position. 10
FG000185
Figure 142
11. Left and Right Control Stand Height
Adjustment
The left and right dials (11, Figure 142) at the lower part of
the seat can be turned to adjust the elevation height of
each control stand.
It can be used to adjust the height of the control joystick.
12. Air Suspension Seat (Optional)

12
The operator seat is also available with air suspension for
even better comfort. The switch (12, Figure 143) in the
middle of the seat can be used to adjust the air cushion. If
the switch is pressed, the seat become harder, and pulling
it out makes the seat softer, when the air is bleed out.
FG000187
Figure 143
13. Heating the Operator's Seat (Optional)

The air suspension seat can be heated. The switch on the O
left control stand is used to warm the seat. When heating is
not needed or seat is warmed, turn the switch to "OFF" I
position.
FG000034
Figure 144

2-61
CEILING COVER
NOTE: If the machine is equipped with the optional
transparent ceiling cover never use any chemical
cleaners on its surface. Only use warm water to wash
dust and dirt from its surfaces, and after that, dry it
with a soft fabric towel.
FG000189
Figure 145
Opening the Ceiling Cover

1. Lower bucket to ground.
2. Set safety lever (Figure 145) on "LOCK".
3. Pull the lock (1, Figure 146) in front center of ceiling cover
and push it up with handle.
Closing the Ceiling Cover

2. Set safety lever (Figure 145) on "LOCK".
3. Pull down cover with the handle (Figure 146) so that the
lock (1) can be locked in the bracket in the ceiling frame.
1
FG000190
Figure 146

2-62
FRONT WINDOWS
WARNING
When leaving operator's seat, set the safety lever to
"LOCK" position (Figure 147), if not a serious accident
could occur by accidentally moving the work levers.
FG000189
Figure 147
Front Upper Window

The front upper window can be housed in the cabin's ceiling.
Opening the Window
WARNING
2
When stowing front window in the cabin roof, make sure
both release levers (1, Figure 148) are latched.

1
2. Set safety lever (Figure 147) on "LOCK". FG000192
3. Set engine speed control dial to "LOW IDLE". Allow engine Figure 148
to idle for three - five minutes.
4. Shut down engine by turning key to "O" (OFF) position.
5. Hold the window handles (1, Figure 148), then pull the lock
levers (2) to release the lock. The top of the front window
will come out.
6. Pull window up, and push it against lock pin at the rear of
the cabin. Make sure that it is securely latched.
7. Check that lock levers are securely latched in the lock
position.
NOTE: When the front upper window is open, never
extend your head or body through the window
frame.
NOTE: If the window happens to fall with a strong
impact against the machine, while some part of
your body is extended out of the cabin, it may
result in bodily injury.

2-63
Closing the Window
WARNING
Be careful that your hands are not caught in window frame.

2. Set safety lever (Figure 147) on "LOCK", and shut down 1
2
engine. FG000193
3. Holding upper handles (1, Figure 149) of front window with Figure 149
left and right-hand, pull lock levers (2, Figure 149) to
release the lock.
4. Push window forward, and lower it slowly.
5. When the bottom of the window, reaches the top of the
front bottom window, push the front window to engage the
lock (2, Figure 148).
6. Check that lock levers are securely latched in the lock
position.
Front Bottom Window

1
The front bottom window can be removed and stored in the rear
of the cabin.
1. After stowing the front upper window in the cabin ceiling,
remove bottom window (1, Figure 150) from cabin in
direction of the arrow.
FG000194
Figure 150
2. Set bottom window in rubber holders (2, Figure 151)

behind operator's seat. Secure window with left and right
knobs (3) with push button (4). 3
4
WARNING 2
Never have wet hands when handling a window. Never

drop window or let it come into contact with other
parts of the machine.
FG001345
Figure 151

2-64
DOOR SIDE LATCH
1. The door side latch (1, Figure 152) is used to secured the
door to the side of the cabin when it is opened.
NOTE: Keep the door closed and locked when machine
is not in use.
FG000196
Figure 152
2. To release door from side of cabin, push the latch lever (2,
Figure 153) down. The latch lever is to the left of the
operator's seat.
FG000673
Figure 153

2-65
CABIN STORAGE
2
COMPARTMENTS
There are two storage compartments behind the operator's seat.
The large compartment (1, Figure 154) is for storing
nonperishable items.
The covered other one (2, Figure 154) is interconnected with the
air conditioner. So, it can be supplied with either warm or cool air 1
when air conditioner is turned "ON". FG000209
Figure 154
There is a separate small tray (3, Figure 155) on the right side of
operator's seat.
3
FG000675
Figure 155
ASHTRAY
An ashtray (1, Figure 156) is to the right side of the operator's 1
seat on the side of the cabin. Always close ashtray after putting
out a cigarette.
FG013855
Figure 156

2-66
SUN VISOR
The sun visor can be used to reduce the amount of sunlight
coming through the front window and ceiling.
When wanting to reduce the amount of sunlight coming in the
front window, pull bar (1, Figure 157) down.
2
When not wanting protection, hold the bar with left-hand and
push the release button (2, Figure 157) with right-hand. This will
allow the visor to retract. 1
FG000201
NOTE: Do not allow the visor to roll back up without holding
it. Not holding it may result in damage to the visor and Figure 157
retract mechanism.
Ceiling sun visor (3, Figure 158) slides forward and
backwards.Move it with handle (4) on each side.
4
3
FG000676
Figure 158
When opening the ceiling cover (if equipped), push the sun visor
into its compartment (Figure 159).
FG000204
Figure 159
HANGER
A hanger (1, Figure 160) is located on the upper left side of the
operator's compartment.
WARNING
Do not hang anything that will easily fall down, or will 1
impair your view out of the cabin.
FG000210
Figure 160

2-67
CUP HOLDER
There is a cup holder on the right side of the compartment (1,
Figure 161). Open the access cover and lower it to a horizontal
position.
1
FG000205
Figure 161
DOOR WINDOW HOLDER

1
When the machine is being operated with the cabin door window
opened, window vibration can be reduced by tightening knob (1,
Figure 162) against the window.
FG000206
Figure 162
EMERGENCY GLASS BREAKING

TOOL
The excavator is equipped with a glass breaking tool. It is to the
upper right corner of the cabin. This tool can be used in case of
an emergency situation which requires the breaking of glass to
exit from the cabin. Grip the handle firmly and use the sharp
point to break the glass.
FG000178
WARNING Figure 163
Protect your eyes when breaking the glass.

2-68
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESS
COVERS AND DOORS
Side Door
Open the side access door and slide prop rod (1, Figure 164) in
slot (2) until it locks at the end of slot. 1
2
FG016076
Figure 164
Battery Box Door
Opening 1
Open door until locking device (1, Figure 165) latches.
Closing
While holding door, press locking device to release lock and
close door.
FG016077
Figure 165
Engine Cover
Open the cover and slide prop rod (1, Figure 166) in the slot (2)
until it locks in notch (3) at the end of slot to support the cover.
2
To close cover, move end of prop rod out of notch so it can slide
in slot.
3
1
FG016078
Figure 166

2-69
2-70
OP001122
3Operation
TO HANDLE A NEW
EXCAVATOR
All DOOSAN excavators are inspected and adjusted before
leaving the factory. However, it is required that the operator
follow these steps during the initial break-in period. Failure to
follow these steps may result in damage to the equipment or
reduced performance.
Hour Load
Maintain about 80% load of
For first 50 hours of operation. full capacity (Engine rpm:
80% of rated rpm)
After first 50 hours of operation. Full load
If machine is used at full load before it is broken in, it may affect

the life cycle and safe running operations. This could lead to
problems later.
NOTE: 1. Check daily for leakage of coolant, fuel, engine
oil and hydraulic oil.
2. Inspect all lubricants daily, add appropriate
lubricants as required.
3. During operation, monitor all instruments and
gauges from time to time.
4. Avoid an extreme engine load.
5. Operate unit at 80% load until engine and all
other components are at operating temperature.
6. Check that work equipment is operating
normally during operation.
7. Check machine for loose parts or for damage
that may have occurred during shipping.
8. Check for loose wiring or terminals, check
gauge operation and battery electrolyte level.
Operation OP001122
3-1
Lubrication and Filters
1. Change engine oil and replace oil filter after first 50 hours
of operation.
2. Change swing reduction device oil after first 250 hours of
operation.
3. Change hydraulic oil return filter after first 250 hours of
operation.
4. Replace travel and reduction gear oil after first 250 hours
of operation.
NOTE: For the replenishment of oil or grease, refer to
“Inspection, Maintenance and Adjustment” on
page 4-1 of this manual.
STARTING AND STOPPING THE

ENGINE
Inspection Before Starting Engine
WARNING
If a flammable materials such as leaves, paper, etc. are
allowed to accumulate on high temperature components,
such as the engine muffler and turbo, a fire may occur.
Fuel, lubricant and hydraulic oil leaks, may cause a fire. If
there is anything wrong, perform the appropriate corrective
action.
Before starting engine, inspect the following items;

1. Electric system - Check for damaged electric cables, and
loose or missing connectors.
2. Fuel system - Drain water and sediment from fuel tank and
water separator.
3. Hydraulic system - Check for hydraulic oil leaks, damaged
tubing and hoses, and interference points of components.
4. Lubrication - Perform all daily and periodic maintenance
services. Perform services according to reading shown on
hour meter.
5. Safety - Perform a machine walk-around. Make sure that
no one is under the machine or performing any
maintenance on it, before starting engine.
6. After starting machine - Check that all operational controls
and components, are in proper operating condition, and
are functioning correctly. Stop operation and correct any
malfunction before continuing work.
Operation OP001122
3-2
Operational Checks Before Starting
Engine
WARNING
When leaving operator's seat, set the safety lever to
"LOCK" (Figure 1) position, if not a serious accident could
occur by accidentally moving the travel or work levers.
FG000211
1. Set safety lever on "LOCK" (Figure 1). Figure 1
2. Fasten seat belt. Check for proper operation and condition.
3. Set all operation levers in "NEUTRAL".
NOTE: Be careful not to touch any switches when
starting engine.
4. Rotate the starter switch to the "I" (ON) position (Figure 2).
Check all indicator lights. A warning buzzer will sound for
about two seconds. After two seconds, all lights except the
O I
following will turn "OFF".
• Charging warning light
• Engine oil pressure warning light
• Engine coolant temperature gauge
• Fuel gauge
• Hydraulic oil temperature gauge FG000084
Figure 2
• Engine rpm (0 rpm) digital readout
NOTE: If all of the indicator lights do not come "ON"
when the key is first turned, there is a problem.
Operation OP001122
3-3
Engine Start
WARNING
Start the engine after sounding horn and making sure that
there are no people or obstacles in the area.
1. Perform all steps in “Operational Checks Before Starting

Engine” on page 3-3.
2. Set engine speed control dial slightly above "LOW IDLE"
(Figure 3).
3. Sound horn.
HAOB34L
Figure 3
4. Enter password.
NOTE: If the security system is "LOCKED", a four-digit
password will be required to start the engine. If the
system is "UNLOCKED", no password will be ENTER
required and this display screen will not appear. PASSWORD
FG013717
Figure 4
" "
5. Turn starter switch to (START) position (Figure 5).
Engine should start in approximately five seconds. O I
WARNING
If the engine does not start after approximately fifteen
seconds of cranking, release the starter switch. Wait
about five minutes and repeat above step.
6. After engine has started, release key. Key will return to the FG000085
"I" (ON) position (Figure 5). Figure 5
7. Follow procedures in “Hydraulic System Warm-up” on

page 3-9.
Operation OP001122
3-4
8. After warming unit, check all operating indicators to make
4 5 6 7
sure that all engine systems (oil pressure, coolant, etc.) are
in the normal operating range. If any problems are noticed, CHECK
shut down engine. Normal indicators are:
PWR
1 2 3 FG013731
Figure 6
INDICATOR
No. INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT OR GAUGE
READING
1 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge Blue Range
2 Fuel Gauge Blue Range
3 Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge Blue Range
4 Charging Warning OFF
5 Engine Oil Pressure Warning OFF
6 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning OFF
7 Engine Check Warning OFF
9. Check color of exhaust smoke.

• No color or light blue - Engine is running in good
condition.
• Black - Incomplete combustion. Check cause.
• White or dark blue - Engine is burning engine oil.
Check cause.
10. Check for usual engine vibration and noises. If any are
heard or felt, investigate cause.
NOTE: If engine coolant temperature gauge pointer
moves into the red zone, the engine coolant
temperature warning light will turn "ON", a
warning buzzer will sound, and the engine
speed will be automatically reduced. Allow the
engine to run at low idle speed until the
temperature gauge registers in the blue zone
again. When the blue zone is reached, allow the
engine to idle for an additional three - five
minutes before shutting down the engine. If not
allowed to idle, heat surge may develop which
will damage the engine. Allowing the engine to
idle will dissipate heat. Check the coolant level,
look for a loose fan belt, inspect for debris
around radiator, and so on.
Operation OP001122
3-5
Cold Weather Starting
WARNING
DO NOT USE STARTING FLUIDS. The preheat system could
cause the starting fluid to explode. Starting fluids should
never be used.
1. Perform all steps in "Operational Checks Before Starting

Engine".
2. Set engine speed control dial slightly above "LOW IDLE" HAOB34L
(Figure 7). Figure 7
3. Sound horn.
4. Turn starter switch to the "I" (ON) position (Figure 8). When
preheat cycle is completed, the preheat indicator light (1,
Figure 9) will turn "OFF".
O I
FG000084
Figure 8
PWR
FG013732
Figure 9
5. After the preheat completion, immediately turn starter
switch to " " (START) position (Figure 10). Engine O I

should start in approximately five seconds.
WARNING
If the engine does not start after approximately fifteen
seconds of cranking, release the starter switch. Wait
about five minutes and repeat above step. FG000085
Figure 10
Operation OP001122
3-6
6. After engine has started, release key. Key will return to the
"I" (ON) position (Figure 10).
7. After the engine starts, check all operating indicators to
make sure that all engine systems (oil pressure, coolant,
etc.) are in the normal operating range. If any problems are
noticed, shut down engine.
8. Follow "Hydraulic System Warm-up" procedures in this
section. (See page 3-9)
Starting Engine With a Booster Cable
WARNING
1. An explosive gas is produced while batteries are in
use or being charged. Keep flames or sparks away
from the battery area.
2. Charge batteries in a well ventilated area.
3. Always wear eye protection when starting a machine HAOA440L
with jumper cables. Figure 11
4. Improper jump starting procedures can cause an
explosion resulting in personal injury.
5. Jump start vehicles on dry ground or concrete. Do not
jump start the machine on a steel floor, because the
floor is always grounded.
6. When starting from another machine, make sure the
machines do not touch.
7. Always connect the auxiliary battery positive (+)
terminal too depleted battery positive (+) terminal first.
Then connect auxiliary battery negative (-) terminal to
the frame of the depleted battery machine second.
8. Connect positive cable first when installing cables and
disconnect the negative cable first when removing.
IMPORTANT
The machine has a 24V (-) negative ground electrical
system. Use the same capacity 24V booster batteries when
jump starting engine.
If the batteries are drained during starting procedures, jump start

engine using auxiliary or booster batteries according to the
following procedure;
Operation OP001122
3-7
Connecting the Booster Batteries
1
1. Shut down engine of the machine on which booster RED
batteries (3, Figure 12) are mounted.

2. Connect one end of red cable (1, Figure 12) to the positive
(+) terminal of the machine batteries (4), and the other end
to the positive (+) terminal of the booster batteries.
3. Connect one end of black cable (2, Figure 12) to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster batteries (3), and then 3 4
BLACK
make ground connection to the upper frame (5) of the
machine to be started with the other end of black (-) cable 2 5
(2, Figure 12). When making the last connection to upper ARO0440L
frame, be sure to connect the cable end as far away from Figure 12
the machine batteries as possible. DO NOT CONNECT
DIRECTLY TO THE NEGATIVE BATTERY TERMINAL.
4. Start the engine.
Disconnecting the Booster Batteries

1. Disconnect black negative (-) cable (2, Figure 12) from the
machine frame (5) first.
2. Disconnect the other end of black negative (-) cable (2,
Figure 12) from the booster batteries (3).
3. Disconnect red positive (+) cable (1, Figure 12) from the
booster batteries (3).
4. Disconnect red positive (+) cable (1, Figure 12) from the
machine batteries (4).
Operation OP001122
3-8
Hydraulic System Warm-up
WARNING
If a problem or abnormal operation occurs, immediately
shut down engine. Allow excavator to reach normal
operating temperature before starting work, especially in
cold weather.
The correct operating temperature of the hydraulic oil is 50° -

80°C (120° - 175°F). Make sure to follow the procedures listed
here for hydraulic fluid warm-up.
1. Run engine for approximately five minutes set at the
middle of the speed range, without a load.
HAOB410L
Figure 13
2. Set safety lever (1, Figure 14) on "UNLOCK" position.
FG000093
Figure 14
3. Slowly cycle boom, arm and bucket cylinders about five

times without a load to circulate the oil through the system.
Do this for five minutes.
4. Check for clearance and fully raise the front attachment.
Swing clockwise 3 revolutions. Swing counterclockwise 3
revolutions.
5. Travel forward and reverse at low speed for two
revolutions of the drive sprocket.
FG000380
Figure 15
Operation OP001122
3-9
Hydraulic System Warm-up – Cold
Weather
1. Run engine at "LOW IDLE" (no load) for five minutes
(Figure 16).
HAOB290L
Figure 16
2. Run engine for approximately five minutes set at the

middle of the speed range, without a load (Figure 17).
HAOB410L
Figure 17
3. Set safety lever (1, Figure 18) on "UNLOCK" position.
FG000093
Figure 18
4. Slowly cycle boom, arm and bucket cylinders about five

times without a load to circulate the oil through the system.
Do this for five minutes.
FG000380
Figure 19
Operation OP001122
3-10
5. Set engine speed control dial to "HIGH IDLE" (Figure 20).
6. Repeat Step 4 for five minutes. If working speeds continue
to be slow, continue to operate, but use extreme caution
because the machine function may be erratic.
7. Check for clearance and fully raise the front attachment.
Slowly swing clockwise 3 revolutions. Slowly swing
counterclockwise 3 revolutions.
8. Travel forward and reverse at low speed for two
revolutions of the drive sprocket.
HAOB550L
Figure 20
Operation OP001122
3-11
Engine Shut Down
NOTE: Allow engine to idle for three - five minutes before
shutting down the engine. If not allowed to idle, heat
surge may develop which will damage the engine.
Allowing the engine to idle will dissipate heat.
1. Park excavator on level and firm ground.
2. Lower front end attachment to ground and make sure all
operating controls are in "NEUTRAL".
FG015775
Figure 21
3. Set safety lever on "LOCK" position (Figure 22).
Unlock
Lock
FG001091
Figure 22
4. Set engine speed control dial to "LOW IDLE" (Figure 23).

Allow engine to idle for three - five minutes.
HAOB290L
Figure 23
5. Shut down engine by turning key to "O" (OFF) position

(Figure 24). O I
6. Remove key from starter switch.
FG000390
Figure 24
Operation OP001122
3-12
Check and Confirmation After Stopping
Engine
1. Repair excavator, if there are any coolant or oil leaks.
2. Inspect front attachment and under carriage for abnormal
appearances. Correct any problems.
3. Fill fuel tank.
4. Get rid of any accumulated flammable materials such as
leaves and paper etc. in engine compartment.
5. Clean all mud, etc. from undercarriage and tracks. Make
sure that all steps and hand holds are clean, and that the
operator's compartment is clean.
SAFETY LEVER
WARNING
When stopping engine or leaving the operator's seat,
"LOCK" the safety lever, otherwise, a serious accident may
occur by accidental movement of travel and work levers.
Whenever leaving the operator's seat, make sure the engine
is shut down and the safety lever is "LOCKED".
Especially, when adjusting the seat, control stands, or
raising the front window, lower window, or ceiling cover,
never forget to lock the safety lever in its "LOCKED"
position.
Be careful not to move the work levers (joysticks) when moving

safety lever.
1. Push safety lever (Figure 25) down into the "LOCKED"
position. When safety lever is in the "LOCKED" position,
the front attachment, swing and travel movement will be
disabled even though a lever is moved. Unlock
NOTE: Lower bucket (front attachment) to ground.
Place all control levers in "NEUTRAL" and shut
down engine, before using the safety lever.
2. Set safety lever (Figure 25) on "RELEASE/UNLOCK"
position, by pulling it up before starting work.
Lock
NOTE: When the engine is not running, but the safety FG001091
lever is "RELEASED" and the starter key is Figure 25
tuned "ON", moving the work levers (joysticks)
may result in movement. The charged
accumulators in the system will provide pilot
pressure for control valve spool movement.
Operation OP001122
3-13
TRAVEL
WARNING
1. Before operating the travel levers, make sure that you
know in which direction the machine is pointing. Look
at the end of the track assemblies. If the drive motors
are visible while sitting in the operator's seat, you are
looking at the back end of the track assembly
(therefore, you are looking backwards). In this case,
the response of the travel levers will be the reverse of
normal operation.
2. Before moving, make sure that there are no personnel
in the way or on the machine. Sound the horn to alert
workers that you are about to move the machine.
3. Be sure the path is clear during travel.
4. Use extreme caution when reversing travel. Be sure
there is a clear path behind the machine.
5. Make sure to operate the travel control levers
smoothly to avoid sudden starts or stops.
6. Before leaving the operator's seat, make sure to lock
out all control systems and shut down the engine to
avoid accidental activation.
Automatic Travel Speed Control
WARNING
Do not change the travel mode while traveling. Always use
speed mode "O" when traveling down a slope. It is very
dangerous to change to speed modes indicated "I" or "II"
while going down a slope. Only change travel mode after
coming to a complete stop.
Two travel speed ranges can be selected by using the travel

speed selector switch on the control panel (Figure 26).
"O" (LOW) - In this position low travel speed and a higher torque O
are selected. I
"I" (HIGH) - In this position high travel speed and a lower torque
II
are selected.
"II" (AUTOMATIC) - Setting the control at the "II" position
enables the machine to change to a different speed range
automatically. This change happens automatically depending on
the hydraulic oil pressure in the travel circuit. When hydraulic oil
pressure rises, the travel speed is automatically set to low. An FG000023
example is if the machine is traveling on a flat, solid surface, the Figure 26
higher speed range would be used. When a slope is
encountered, the speed drops and the travel circuit hydraulic
pressure rises, causing the control circuit to shift to the higher
torque, lower speed range.
Operation OP001122
3-14
Travel Control Lever Operation
1. To travel straight (Figure 27), push both travel control
levers/pedals fully forward or backwards. The farther the
levers/pedals are pressed, the faster the travel speed.
NOTE: "X" is the sprocket end of the track.
OPTION: Straight Travel Pedal (Figure 27, dotted line
view) - To travel straight, push travel control
pedal forward or backward without using travel
control levers. The farther the pedal is pressed,
the faster the travel speed. "X"
FG016194
Figure 27
2. Pivot turns (Figure 28) are made by rotating only one track
forward or backward. The machine will pivot on the
nonmoving track.
"X"
FG000304
Figure 28
3. Spin turns (Figure 29) are made by rotating one track

forward and one track backward. The machine will spin
around its center point, thus counterrotating.
"X"
FG000305
Figure 29
4. Stopping travel (Figure 30) - Returning travel levers to

"NEUTRAL" position will automatically apply brakes and
stop excavator.
OPTION: Straight Travel Pedal (Figure 30, dotted line
view) - Stop travel by letting travel pedal return
to "NEUTRAL" position. This will automatically
apply brakes and stop excavator.
"X"
FG016195
Figure 30
Operation OP001122
3-15
General Travel Instructions
1. Set engine speed control dial (Figure 31) on desired
speed.
HAOB550L
Figure 31
2. Set safety lever on "UNLOCK" position, and folding the

front, raise it 40 - 50 cm (16 - 20 in) above ground. See
Figure 32.
40 ~ 50 cm
FG015776
Figure 32
3. When possible, travel on firm, level ground. Avoid sudden

movements and sharp turns.
4. When traveling on rough ground, travel at a slow speed
[1.0 - 1.5 km/h (0.62 - 0.93 MPH)]. Reduced engine speed,
to avoid shock loading the equipment. Be careful that an
excessive force is not added to equipment by touching or
climbing on rocks.
FG000423
Figure 33
Operation OP001122
3-16
5. On rough, frozen or uneven terrain, travel slowly.
WARNING
When traveling, keep bucket from 20 - 30 cm (8 - 12 in)
above ground.
Do not travel backward on a slope.
Never turn or travel crosswise on a slope.
Choose a safe alternate route before climbing a slope.
FG015846
If excavator starts to slip or becomes unstable, lower
Figure 34
the bucket immediately into the ground, using it as a
brake.
Avoid working on slopes, because there is a danger of
overturning by becoming unbalance while swinging
and performing front attachment operations.
It is very dangerous to swing towards bottom of slope
with a loaded bucket.
In unavoidable cases level the slope with fill soil, to
make the vehicle as horizontal as possible. See Figure
34.
Do not travel on slopes more than 30° due to turnover
danger.
6. Travel straight up or down slopes, never diagonally across

the slope. See Figure 35 and Figure 36. Extend the arm
and lower the boom to keep the bucket about 20 - 30 cm (8
- 12 in) off the ground. If the machine starts to slide or
becomes unstable, lower the bucket to regain control. If the
engine stalls, lower the bucket, make sure that all controls 20 ~
are in the neutral position and restart the engine. 30 c
m
NOTE: Even though engine stops on a slope, do not
operate swing control. The hydraulic
accumulators may cause the unit to swing.
FG015777
NOTE: Do not open or close operator's door on a slope.
Figure 35
Make sure door is latched.
cm
~ 30
20
FG015778
Figure 36
Operation OP001122
3-17
7. If dirt or mud builds up in the track frame, raise each track
and rotate and clean that track.
CAUTION
When using the boom and arm to lift any portion of the
machine, roll the bucket until the round base is against
the ground. The angle of the arm to the boom should
be at 90°.
FG000376
Figure 37
Make sure that the material buildup has been cleared. See
Figure 37 and Figure 38.
8. The excavator can travel in water that comes up to center
of upper carriage rollers. Make sure that footing is solid so
that the machine will not sink. See “Working in Water” on 90 ~ 110
page 3-29.
NOTE: If the machine is submerged to the point that
water or mud gets into the swing bearing or
center joint, stop machine operation. Remove
the machine from the submerged location to FG015779
firm, dry ground. Do not operate until proper
Figure 38
inspection and maintenance have been
completed. Refer to the Shop Manual or contact
your distributor.
Operation OP001122
3-18
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Engine Speed Control

Engine speed can be manually adjusted using the engine speed
control dial, Increase engine speed by rotating the control knob
clockwise. Decrease engine speed by rotating the control knob
counterclockwise.
IMPORTANT
The engine speed control system has been set at the HAOA690L
factory and should not require adjustment as part of routine Figure 39
maintenance.
Mode Selection
More efficient work can be done by choosing a proper power
and work mode combination, suitable to type of work and
conditions. Use the mode selection according to following guide.
Power Mode
1
1. When the starter switch is turned "ON" the power mode is
automatically defaulted to the standard setting.
2. Select a proper power mode using button (1, Figure 40)
before starting work. 1 2
3. When the power mode button (1, Figure 40) is pressed, a

signal sounds, changing the power mode to either "ON" or
"OFF". When the power mode is turned "ON", the symbol
indicates on the screen. 6 7
FG013733
Deactivate the power mode by pressing it a second time.
Figure 40
When the power mode is turned "OFF", the symbol of
standard mode indicates on the screen and the power
mode returns to the standard mode.
Mode Selection Point

• Required to perform heavy work in a short period of time.
POWER MODE • Fast speed loading.
• Fast speed travel.
• General work.
STANDARD MODE
• Optimize fuel consumption.
• Light work.
ECONOMY MODE • Minimize fuel consumption.
• Reduce noise.
Operation OP001122
3-19
Economy Mode
1. When the starter switch is turned "ON" the power mode is
automatically defaulted to the standard setting.
2. Select a proper economy mode using button (2, Figure 41)
before starting work. 1 2
3. When the economy mode button (2, Figure 41) is pressed,

a signal sounds, changing the economy mode to either
"ON" or "OFF". When the economy mode is turned "ON",
the symbol appears on the screen. 6 7
Deactivate the economy mode by pressing it a second 2 FG013742
time. When the economy mode is turned "OFF", the Figure 41
symbol of standard mode. Appears on the screen and the
economy mode returns to the standard mode.
Auto Idle Mode

3
1. The system will automatically reduce engine speed to idle
speed approximately four seconds after all of the control
levers are in the neutral position. When a pilot function is
activated, engine speed is automatically returned to the 1 2
preselected range.
2. When the starter switch is turned "ON", the work mode is
automatically defaulted to "AUTO IDLE".
3. When the symbol is turned "ON", the auto idle function is 6 7
activated. Deactivate the auto idle function by again FG013743
pressing the auto idle selector button (3, Figure 42). At this Figure 42
time the symbol will be turned "OFF".
WARNING
Turn "OFF' auto idle function when performing work in
close operating area, i.e., work in a narrow area and
loading / unloading on or off a trailer.
Operation OP001122
3-20
Boost Mode
1. Power boost switch is used to gain maximum digging I
O
force.
II
2. The power boost is activated while the lower button is
being pressed on top of the right-hand work lever
(joystick). The breaker / boost / shear selector switch must
be in the "O" (BOOST) position.
NOTE: The power boost mode does not affect forward
and reverse travel.
Do not use this switch for more than ten
seconds.
FG000117
Figure 43 RIGHT-HAND WORK LEVER
(JOYSTICK)
Operation OP001122
3-21
Work Levers (Joysticks) (ISO Style)
WARNING 1 5
3 4 7 8
Check surrounding area before swinging. When operating a
lever while in auto idle, do it carefully, because the engine
speed will increase rapidly. 2 6
NOTE: When starting work, move work levers (joysticks) slowly

FG000381
and check movement of swing and front attachment.
Figure 44
This equipment is manufactured using the lever configuration
described in ISO standards. Do not change valving, hoses, etc., that
would change this standard. The boom, arm and bucket movements
and swing direction of work levers (joysticks) are as follows:
Left-hand Work Lever (Joystick) (Figure 44 and Figure 45)
4
1. Arm dump
2. Arm crowd 1
3
3. Left swing
2
4. Right swing
NOTE: The swing brake is spring applied and
hydraulically released. It is always engaged
when the work lever (joystick) is in "NEUTRAL"
or the engine is shut down. FG015780
Figure 45
NOTE: The following is not a mechanical malfunction

but a proper phenomenon of the excavator.
When operating the arm, it may stop
momentarily. When the arm is operated, the
weight of the arm may cause it to move faster
than the amount of oil being supplied.
FG015781
Figure 46
Right-hand Work Lever (Joystick) (Figure 44 and Figure 47)

5. Boom down 6
6. Boom up
7. Bucket crowd
8. Bucket dump 7
5
8
NOTE: Even after stopping the engine, the front can be
lowered to the ground by operating work lever
(joystick), by setting safety lever on "UNLOCK"
position and turning starter switch "ON". FG015782
Figure 47
Operation OP001122
3-22
Change Machine Control Pattern by Select
Valve (If Equipped)
1 5
WARNING 3 4 7 8
Check surrounding area before swinging. When operating a 2 6

lever while in auto idle, do it carefully, because the engine
speed will increase rapidly.
FG000381
Figure 48
NOTE: When starting work, move work levers (joysticks)

slowly and check movement of swing and front <ISO PATTERN>
attachment.
IS
The machine control pattern can easily be changed to the ISO
O
standard or to the standard backhoe loader hydraulic system
(BHL) by changing the position of the select valve (if equipped).
Use the following procedure to change the position of the select
L
valve.
BH
The select valve is located in the rear of the cabin.
1. Rotating spool to the ISO position or to the BHL position. <BHL PATTERN>
(Figure 49)
IS
O
L
BH
FG004954
Figure 49
Operation OP001122
3-23
Work Levers (Joysticks) (BHL Style)
Left-hand Work Lever (Joystick) (Figure 48 and Figure 50)

2
4
1. Boom down
2. Boom up 3
3. Left swing
4. Right swing 1
NOTE: The swing brake is spring applied and

hydraulically released. It is always engaged
when the work lever (joystick) is in "NEUTRAL"
or the engine is shut down. FG015853
Figure 50
Right-hand Work Lever (Joystick) (Figure 48 and Figure 51)

5. Arm dump 5
6. Arm crowd
7. Bucket crowd 6
8. Bucket dump 7
8
NOTE: The following is not a mechanical malfunction
but a proper phenomenon of the excavator.
When operating the arm, it may stop
momentarily. When the arm is operated, the FG015854
weight of the arm may cause it to move faster Figure 51
than the amount of oil being supplied.
NOTE: Even after stopping the engine, the front can be
lowered to the ground by operating work lever
(joystick), by setting safety lever on "UNLOCK"
position and turning starter switch "ON".
FG015781
Figure 52
Operation OP001122
3-24
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
Do not rest your feet on the travel pedals during normal
machine operation. Unexpected machine travel may occur
in this situation.
1. Before starting work, investigate terrain and soil condition.

Level ground and drain area if necessary.
2. Install window guards when working where there is a
possibility of falling rocks or other objects.
FG000374
Figure 53
3. Check strength of supported structures in advance before

working on them. If insufficient, reinforce it. If any doubt
exists about structural strength, refuse to operate unit.
4. It is possible that the boom, arm or bucket may come into
contact with the upper or lower structure of the machine.
There are digging conditions which could allow this to
happen.
FG000375
Figure 54
5. Do not continually "bottom out" the hydraulic cylinders.

Machine damage may occur if the cylinders are fully
extended or retracted, example: arm cylinder fully retracted
and the bucket cylinder is extended to rotate the bucket
into the ground.
FG015783
Figure 55
Operation OP001122
3-25
6. Do not use machine travel or swing when the bucket is in
the ground to provide additional breakout force. See Figure
56.
FG015784
Figure 56
7. Do not use machine weight to provide additional breakout

force. See Figure 57.
8. When working on soft or muddy ground, make sure that
the machine is not sinking.
FG015785
Figure 57
9. When working close to the excavated edge, make sure

that the ground the machine is sitting on is solid. Keep the
travel motors (1, Figure 58) to the rear. See Figure 58.
FG015786
Figure 58
10. Do not excavate underneath the machine. See Figure 59.
FG015756
Figure 59
Operation OP001122
3-26
11. Make sure that there is adequate clearance from overhead
electrical supply lines. See Figure 60.
FG015758
Figure 60
12. If the excavation is in an underground location or in a

building, make sure that there is adequate overhead
clearance and that there is adequate ventilation. See
Figure 61.
FG015787
Figure 61
13. Do not use the bucket as a hammer or ramming device.

This is dangerous and causes damage to the front
attachment. See Figure 62.
FG015788
Figure 62
14. Do not dig with the excavator tracks raised. This can result
in structural and mechanical failures.
FG015789
Figure 63
Operation OP001122
3-27
15. Do not operate travel lever quickly when traveling in high
range.
• Avoid sudden starts.
• When traveling in one direction come to a complete
stop before reversing directions. Do not rock
excavator back and forth with levers.
• Avoid sudden stops. Return levers to neutral by
hand. Do not let them snap back to neutral on their
own.
FG000213
16. If the optional long fronts or attachments or heavy duty
front end attachments are used, the machine balance will Figure 64
be altered. Follow these additional operating precautions.
WARNING
Do not travel downhill with the front end attachments
raised.
Do not travel across slopes; travel straight up or down
slope.
Use extreme caution when swinging the upper frame
when positioned on a slope.
Allow extra swing stopping room. The additional
momentum generated by the longer or heavier front
end equipment will increase the amount of time
needed to stop the swing motion.
Make sure that all optional equipment has been
authorized and installed properly.
17. Do not move dirt or objects by swinging the excavator into

them. This can result in structural and mechanical failures.
Operation OP001122
3-28
Working in Water
IMPORTANT
When working in water, do not exceed a slope of more than
15°. If the slope is over 15°, the rear part of the upper
structure will be immersed in water, resulting in radiator fan
damage, and/or engine ECU damage.
FG015790
Figure 65
When working in water, do not operate in water over center of

upper roller (1, Figure 66).
If swing bearing gets wet, immediately grease it until all old
grease is purged from bearing.
If water gets into swing gear housing, drain water immediately
by removing lower inspection cover. Apply new grease.
After working in water, purge old grease on bucket pins.
1
FG015791
Figure 66
Operation OP001122
3-29
PARKING EXCAVATOR
WARNING 120
Park excavator on firm, level ground. Avoid parking on

slopes. If excavator must be parked on a slope, block tracks
and place bucket teeth in ground. See Figure 67.
FG015855
Figure 67
1. Park excavator on firm, level ground. Lower bucket to

ground as shown in Figure 68.
FG015775
Figure 68
2. Set engine speed control dial on "LOW IDLE".
HAOB290L
Figure 69
3. If you touch the operation lever unintentionally, it may

create a serious accident. Before leaving operator's seat,
set safety lever on "LOCK" position.
Unlock
Lock
FG001091
Figure 70
Operation OP001122
3-30
TOWING PROCEDURE Cloth
WARNING
Never use a damaged wire rope or chain. They could brake
and cause a serious accident.
Towing Wire
Always wear gloves when handling a chain or wire rope.
When towing excavator use a wire rope or chain capable of
handling the load.
Attach chain or wire rope to track frame as shown in Figure
71
Insert protective material such as thick cloths between
track frame and wire rope to prevent the wire rope from
being damage.
Towing Wire
FG014876
IMPORTANT Figure 71
Use shackle hook on track frame to only haul objects that

weigh less than 10 metric tons (11.0 U.S. Tons). Never use it
to haul objects over 10 metric tons (11.0 U.S. Tons).
Operation OP001122
3-31
HYDRAULIC BREAKER
IMPORTANT
If a hydraulic breaker and piping is installed without
DOOSAN's authorization, it may create a serious
malfunction which will not be covered under the excavator
warranty.
Selection of Hydraulic Breaker

If a hydraulic breaker is installed, consider equipment's stability
and suitability for such modification. Also, consider hydraulic oil
pressure and quantity. When selecting a hydraulic breaker
consult with a DOOSAN distributor or sales agency.
Hydraulic Hoses and Tubing for Breaker

1. When installing hydraulic breaker, assemble according to
drawings provided with kit.
2. If breaker is taken off excavator, be sure to plug and cap all
hoses and tubing to prevent contamination from entering
hydraulic system.
3. Plug and cap all connectors and fittings on breaker to
prevent contamination.
4. Check all hydraulic connections for signs of leaks or loose
components before starting operation.
Operation OP001122
3-32
Hydraulic Breaker Operation
NOTE: Hydraulic pressure and flow settings may need to be
changed. Refer to the Maintenance Section of this
manual for further information.
1. Make sure to read and understand the breaker user's
manual.
2. Inspect all mechanical and hydraulic connections.
3. Do not use the breaker as a hammer. See Figure 72.
Do not drop breaker from extreme heights.
The breaker is relatively heavy and drops fast. Do not drop
breaker from extreme heights or damage to upper
structure may result.
FG016123
Figure 72
4. Do not operate the breaker with the boom or arm cylinders

fully extended (bottomed out). See Figure 73.
Leave over 100 mm (4 in) of clearance between rod end of
cylinder and cylinder head. This will help prevent damage
to cylinders during breaker operation.
FG016124
Figure 73
5. Do not use the breaker if the hydraulic hoses vibrate

excessively. See Figure 74. Check the breaker's hydraulic
1
accumulator (1) for damage and repair as required. If
excavator is operated under this condition, structural and
hydraulic components can be damaged.
FG016160
Figure 74
Operation OP001122
3-33
6. Do not allow the breaker body to go into water if not
equipped for underwater operation. The breaker seal can
be damaged and allow rust, foreign material or water to
enter the hydraulic system and cause damage. Only insert
the breaker tool into water. See Figure 75.
HAOB970L
Figure 75
7. Do not any lifting or towing with a breaker. See Figure 76.
FG016127
Figure 76
8. Operate the breaker only to the front and rear of the

excavator. Do not use the breaker to either side of the
excavator. Do not swing the breaker from side to side
when operating it. See Figure 77.
WARNING
Operating a breaker with the upper body turned 90° to
the tracks can result in tipping over the machine or
reduction in service life. HAOB990L
Figure 77
9. Do not curl the breaker tool tip into the arm or boom when
traveling or parking the excavator. See Figure 78.
FG016126
Figure 78
Operation OP001122
3-34
To activate breaker
1. Set breaker selector switch to "II" (BREAKER) position. I
O
2. Press lower button on top of right-hand work lever II
(joystick) to activate hydraulic breaker.
3. Release lower button on top of right-hand work lever
(joystick) to deactivate hydraulic breaker.
FG000117
Figure 79 RIGHT-HAND WORK LEVER
(JOYSTICK)
Relief Valve Adjustment

1. Cap pipe on arm end, using a cap capable of handling 350
kg/cm2 under the condition of disconnecting hose to
hydraulic breaker.
2. Adjust pump pressure using activating the breaker, and
watching the pressure displayed on the instrument panel.
Press the display selector button to show digital pressure
reading. (A separate pressure gauge is not required.)
3. Adjust the relief valve pressure by turning the adjustment
FG015792
screw of breaker relief valve. The relief valve is installed on
the left side of the upper structure behind the boom. (Do Figure 80
not use the overload relief valve on the lower part of control
valve for the breaker relief valve.)
WARNING
If the relief valve pressure is adjusted while the
hydraulic breaker is connected, there is possibility
that a high-pressure spike or setting could break a
hose or pipe. Personal injury or death could result
from a hydraulic hose or pipe failure.
Operation OP001122
3-35
Hydraulic Oil and Filter Service Intervals
When using a hydraulic breaker, the viscosity breakdown and
contamination of hydraulic oil is faster because the work
condition is more severe than during normal digging work. To
prevent the hydraulic components (especially pump) from
having a shortened life cycle, replace the hydraulic oil and main
hydraulic oil return filter using the following schedule.
Attachment Operation Rate Hydraulic Oil Filter

250 Hours (First Replacement)
Bucket Work 100% 2,000 Hours
1,000 Hours (After First Replacement)
Hydraulic Breaker
100% 500 Hours 100 Hours
Work
* These service intervals only apply, when a genuine DOOSAN oil and filter are used. If any other
brands are used, the guaranteed changed interval should be reduced in half.
100
105 116 551
106 144 614

80
BREAKER OPTION RATE (%)
112 171 FILTER 692

(First Replacement)
119 214 782
60
128 275 893

HYDRAULIC OIL
137 335 1028
40
FILTER
156 412 (After First Replacement) 1196
175 500 1400

20
206 635 1658
0 500 1000 1500 2000
MACHINE OPERATING HOURS

FG000767
Figure 81
NOTE: The replacement intervals of hydraulic oil and filter

depend upon the amount of time the hydraulic
breaker is being used. These intervals should be
followed as opposed to regularly scheduled
maintenance.
Operation OP001122
3-36
ADJUSTING THE PUMP FLOW
NOTE: For further information, see “Flow Control” on
page 2-44.
1. On the instrument panel, press the flow control button
, the flow control screen (Figure 82) will be displayed.
2. Use "UP" ( ) or "DOWN" ( ) buttons to adjust flow rate.

3. Press "SELECT" ( ) button, to return to normal display
screen and save the flow rate setting.
FLOW CONTROL
E F
C H C H
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
: APPLY ESC: CANCEL
<Normal Display> <Flow Control Display>

FG013831
Figure 82
Flow Control 1-Pump Flow 2-Pump Flow

Step Setting (l/min) Setting (l/min)
0 52
1 130
2 160
3 190
4 220
5 251 1-Pump Flow +
300 l/min (79 U.S.
6 281 gpm)
7 311
8 341
9 371
10 399
Operation OP001122
3-37
Shear Pedal Valve (Optional)
Activating Shear with Pedal Valve

1. Select "SHEAR" with selector switch on right panel. 1
2. Make sure that stopper (Figure 85) is in "SHEAR" position.
NOTE: When stopper is in "SHEAR" position, pedal
valve can be moved/rocked in both directions.
3. Two-way operation is possible by rocking pedal back and
2
forth between positions (1 and 2, Figure 83). When pedal is
in its center (at rest) position, valve is in "NEUTRAL" and
hydraulic oil flow is stopped. FG016187
4. Before operating attachment, be sure to check function Figure 83
controlled by direction of pedal movement.
Activating Breaker with Pedal Valve

1. Select "BREAKER" with selector switch on right panel.
2. Make sure that stopper (Figure 85) is in "BREAKER" 5
position.
NOTE: When stopper is in "BREAKER" position, pedal
valve can be only moved in one direction.
3. With the stopper in "BREAKER" position, pedal can only
be pressed in direction (1, Figure 83). When pedal is in its
4 3
center (at rest) position, valve is in "NEUTRAL" and FG016188
hydraulic oil flow is stopped.
Figure 84
Stopper Positions
The stopper has three positions;
Shear
Breaker
Locked
1. Rotate knob (3, Figure 84) clockwise in direction of arrow.
The stopper (4) then engages or disengages the pedal Breaker
bracket (5). The pedal can then function according to
displayed symbol shown by knob rotation. Lock
Shear
CAUTION FG016196
Figure 85
When only operating breaker or shear using joystick
button(s), and it is not being controlled by pedal, make
sure stopper is in "LOCKED" position to prevent pedal
from being activated.
Operation OP001122
3-38
Rotating Pedal Valve (Optional)
1
Attachment Rotating by Using the Pedal Valve
1. Pressing end (1, Figure 86) is used to turn clockwise.
2. Pressing end (2, Figure 86) is used to turn
counterclockwise.
2
NOTE: Before activating the pedal, be sure to check
the function of the attachment.
FG000405
Figure 86
Locking the Pedal

When rotating is not needed, the pedal can be locked by using
the prop rod (3) locking device.
Locking is completed when the top end of the prop (3) is 1
positioned into pedal hole.
2 FG016191
Figure 87
A. Location for "UNLOCKING".

B, Location for "LOCKING".
FG000407
Figure 88
Attachment Rotation Using the Left-hand Work Lever

(Joystick)
For a machine equipped with an attachment that rotates,
rotation is activated while one of the control buttons is being
pressed on top of the left-hand work lever (joystick).
There are three buttons on top of the left-hand work lever. The
left and right ones are for controlling rotation.
NOTE:The middle button is for the horn.
Left button is for counterclockwise rotation, and the right one is
FG000035
for clockwise rotation.
Figure 89 LEFT-HAND WORK LEVER
(JOYSTICK)
Operation OP001122
3-39
OPERATING TECHNIQUES
Lifting
IMPORTANT
There may be local or government regulations, about the
use of excavators for the lifting of heavy loads. Always
contact your local and government agencies in regards to
these regulations.
To prevent injury, do not exceed the rated load capacity of the

machine. If the machine is not on level ground, load capacities
will vary.
Short slings will prevent excessive load swing.
Use the lifting eye on the bucket that is provided to lift objects.
Always try to maintain the lifting eye (Figure 90) straight below
the center line of the arm and bucket pin. In this manner the
weight of the load is being primarily held only by the pin, and not
by the bucket cylinder, link, and link pins.
When a lifting eye is used, the sling/lifting device must be
fastened to the eye in a manner that will not allow it to come
loose.
The most stable position is over the corner of the machine.
For best stability, carry a load as close to the ground and
machine as possible. HAAD3830
Lift capacity decreases as the distance from the machine swing Figure 90
center line is increased.
Lifting Unknown Weight

When loads are not accurately known are to be lifted, the person
responsible for the job shall ascertain that the weight of the load
does not exceed the machine LOAD RATING CHART at the FRONT LIFT
radius at which it is to be lifted. ZONE
It is recommended that you feel your way into any lift as a

precaution against tip-over. One method is to position the boom
at 90° over the side of the machine. Slowly lift the load until it SIDE LIFT SIDE LIFT
clears the ground. A lift over the side is the most unstable, and ZONE ZONE
as the load is swung into the front zone of the excavator it will
become more stable. DO NOT INCREASE SWING RADIUS
AFTER THE LOAD IS LIFTED.
REAR LIFT
DANGER ZONE
HAAD3842
If a load is picked up from the front zone and swung into the Figure 91
side zone, a tip-over could result causing a deadly or fatal
injury.
Operation OP001122
3-40
Lifting Known Weight
The load chart is the governing factor when lifting known
weights. It is recommended that you feel your way into any lift as
a precaution against tip-over. Whenever possible, lift and swing
payloads between the front idler area.
Pick and Carry

The machine has the ability to pick and carry payloads without
added labor. We recommend when traveling with a suspended
payload, you evaluate the prevailing conditions and determine
the safety precautions required in each case. The following
factors must be considered before attempting to pick and carry a
load.
Align the boom with the forward direction of machine travel.
Maintain this boom position when turning the machine. Turn only
when necessary, at the slowest speed, and at a wide turning
radius.
1. Use the shortest lifting radius distance possible.
2. Keep the load as close to the ground as conditions will
permit.
3. Provide tag lines to prevent load from pendulating.
Pendulating can cause a change in radius. A change in
radius could exceed the load chart rating or cause a
tip-over condition.
4. Govern travel speed to suit conditions.
5. Avoid sudden starts and stops.
Operation OP001122
3-41
OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL
CONDITIONS
NOTE: See “Maintenance in Special Conditions” on
page 4-93 for other recommendations.
Operation In Extreme Cold

If machine is to be operated in extreme cold weather
temperatures, certain precautions must be taken to assure
continued normal operation. The following paragraphs detail
checks to be made to be certain the machine is capable of
operating at these temperatures.
1. Check the cooling system for correct antifreeze solution for
lowest temperature expected. Carefully inspect cooling
system and correct or report any leaks.
2. Keep batteries fully charged to prevent freezing. If water is
added to batteries, run engine at least one hour to mix
electrolyte solution.
3. Keep engine in best possible mechanical condition to
assure easy starting and good performance during
adverse weather conditions.
4. Use engine oil of the proper specifications for the expected
temperatures. Refer to the "Lubrication Specifications" of
the engine manual for details.
5. Keep fuel tank full at all times. Drain condensation from
tank before and after operation. Drain and service fuel
filter. To eliminate clogging of fuel filters due to wax crystal
formation in the fuel, be sure that the fuel used has a cloud
point specification below the lowest expected temperature.
6. Lubricate entire machine according to "Periodic Service
Table and Chart" Section 4, in this manual or lubrication
chart on machine.
7. Start engine and allow it to reach normal operating
temperature before applying load.
A. If mud and ice collects and freezes on any of the
moving parts while machine is idle, apply heat to
thaw the frozen material before attempting to operate
machine.
B. Operate hydraulic units with care until they have
reached a temperature to enable them to operate
normally.
C. Check all machine controls and/or functions to be
sure they are operating correctly.
8. An extra outer air filter should be kept in the operator's
cabin to replace element that could become iced and
cause restricted air flow to engine.
9. If cold weather starting aid must be used, see "Engine
Starting" COLD WEATHER START portion of this manual.
10. Clean off all mud, snow and ice to prevent freezing. Cover
machine with tarpaulin if possible, keep ends of tarpaulin
from freezing to ground.
Operation OP001122
3-42
Operation in Extreme Heat
Continuous operation of the machine in high temperatures may
cause the machine to overheat. Monitor engine and
transmission temperatures and stop machine for a cooling-off
period whenever necessary.
1. Make frequent inspections and services of the fan and
radiator. Check coolant level in radiator. Check grills and
radiator fins for accumulation of dust, sand and insects
which could block the cooling passages.
A. Formation of scale and rust in cooling system occurs
more rapidly in extremely high temperatures. Change
antifreeze each year to keep corrosion inhibitor at full
strength.
B. If necessary, flush cooling system periodically to keep
passage clear. Avoid use of water with a high alkali
content which increases scale and rust formation.
2. Check level of battery electrolyte daily. Keep electrolyte
above plates preventing damage to batteries. Use a slightly
weaker electrolyte solution in hot climates. Dilute 1.28
specific gravity electrolyte as issued to 1.20 - 1.24 specific
gravity readings at full charge. Recharge batteries whenever
they reach a 1.16 specific gravity reading. Batteries
self-discharge at a higher rate if left standing for long
periods at high temperatures. If machine is to stand for
several days, remove batteries and store in a cool place.
WARNING
Do not store acid type storage batteries near stacks of
tires; the acid fumes have a harmful affect on rubber.
3. Service fuel system as directed in "Engine Fuel System"

Section 5, of this manual. Check for water content before
filling fuel tank. High temperatures and cooling off cause
condensation in storage drums.
4. Lubricate as specified in "Periodic Service Chart and
Table" Section 4, in this manual or Lubrication Decal on
the machine.
5. Do not park machine in sun for long periods of time. When
practical park machine under cover to protect it from sun,
dirt and dust.
A. Cover inactive machine with tarpaulin if no suitable
shelter is available. Protect engine compartment,
transmission and hydraulics from entrance of dust.
B. In hot, damp, climates corrosive action will occur on all
parts of the machine and will be accelerated during the
rainy season. Rust and paint blisters will appear on
metal surfaces and fungus growth on other surfaces.
C. Protect all unfinished, exposed surfaces with a film of
preservative lubricating oil. Protect cables and
terminals with ignition insulation compound. Apply
paint or suitable rust preventive to damaged surfaces
to protect them from rust and corrosion.
Operation OP001122
3-43
Operation in Dusty or Sandy Areas
Operation of the machine can cause dust in almost any area.
However, when in predominantly dusty or sandy areas,
additional precautions must be taken.
1. Keep cooling system fins and cooling areas clean. Blow
out with compressed air, if possible, as often as necessary.
WARNING
Wear goggles when using compressed air.
2. Use care when servicing fuel system to prevent dust and

sand from entering the tank.
3. Service the air cleaner at frequent intervals, check air
restriction indicator daily and keep dust cup and dust valve
clean. Prevent dust and sand from entering engine parts
and compartments as much as possible.
4. Lubricate and perform services outlined on current
lubrication chart on machine and "Lubrication Chart and
Table" Section 4. Clean all lubrication fittings before
applying lubricant. Sand mixed with lubricant becomes
very abrasive and speeds wear on parts.
5. Protect machine from dust and sand as much as possible.
Park machine under cover or protect with tarpaulin to keep
dust and sand from damaging unit.
Operation in Rainy or Humid Conditions

Operation under rainy conditions is similar to that as in extreme
heat procedures listed previously.
1. Keep all exposed surfaces coated with preservative
lubricating oil. Pay particular attention to damaged or
unpainted surfaces. Cover all paint cracks and chip marks
as soon as possible to prevent corrosive effects.
Operation in Salt Water Areas

The corrosive effect of salt water and salt water spray is very
extensive. When operating in salt water areas, observe the
following precautions.
1. When exposed to salt water, dry machine thoroughly and
rinse with fresh water as soon as possible.
2. Keep all exposed surfaces coated with preservative
lubricating oil. Pay particular attention to damaged paint
surfaces.
3. Keep all painted surfaces in good repair.
4. Lubricate machine as prescribed on lubrication chart on
machine or "Periodic Service Table and Chart" Section 4,
in this manual. Shorten lubricating intervals for parts
subject to exposure to salt water, if found necessary.
Operation OP001122
3-44
Operation at High Altitudes
Normally, operation of machine at high altitudes will be as
outlined in extreme cold. Before operating at high altitudes,
engine fuel and air mixture may have to be adjusted according
to appropriate engine manual.
1. Check engine operating temperature for evidence of
overheating. The pressure cap on radiator must make a
perfect seal to maintain coolant pressure in the system.
Operation OP001122
3-45
Operation OP001122
3-46
OP001123
4Inspection, Maintenance
and Adjustment
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Routine maintenance and inspections are required to keep your
machine in the correct operating condition. The following pages
list the inspection intervals, the system or component checks,
and location references.
NOTE: The following pages list the service checks and their
required intervals. The service cycles may need to be
shortened depending on the working conditions.
Extremely hot or dusty conditions will require more
frequent service. Operational hours are determined
by the amount of time accumulated on the engine
hour meter on the control console in the cabin. HAOA601L
Figure 1
NOTE: Besides the normal hour meter, the multifunction

gauge can be used to keep track of the hours on
individual filters. See “Filter / Oil Info” on page 2-39.
E F
C H C H
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 0
FG013662
Figure 2
Inspection, Maintenance and Adjustment OP001123

4-1
Product Identification Number (P. I. N.)
Location
A P.I.N. number, is stamped on the upper frame, under the
boom foot (Figure 3). It is also stamped on the product
identification plate (Figure 4) on outside of the cabin on right.
NOTE: Please make note of these numbers and their
locations. These will be required whenever warranty
or service work is requested. Keep this number on
file, incase the machine is stolen.
FG001447
Figure 3
Doosan Infracore Co., Ltd.

7-11, Hwasu-dong, Dong-gu,
Incheon, Korea
FG012987
Figure 4

4-2
Component Serial Numbers
There are many serial numbers on each traceable components
of the machine. For example, the engine serial number is
stamped on the left side of the engine block, below the rocker
cover. Additional engine information is described on a label
(Figure 5) on the rocker cover.
Please make note of these numbers and their locations. These
will be required whenever warranty service work is requested.
FG016100
Figure 5
Safety Precautions
1. Make sure to lock out the hydraulic controls and post a
notice (Warning Tag) that the machine is being serviced to
prevent any unauthorized operation.
2. Make sure to clean up any fluid spills, especially around
the engine.
3. Inspect all fuel lines to make sure that fittings, lines, filters
and O-rings, etc., are tight and are not showing signs of
wear or damage.
4. If the inspection or test procedure requires that the engine
be running, make sure to keep all unauthorized personnel
away from the machine, and that all industry standard
safety precautions are followed.

4-3
PRELIMINARY WORK MACHINE
SETUP FOR MAINTENANCE
When performing maintenance specified in this manual, always
park the excavator as follows.
NOTE: Certain types of maintenance may require the
machine to be positioned differently. Always return
machine to this position.
1. Park on firm, level ground.
FG015775
Figure 6
3. Set safety lever on "LOCK" position.
Unlock
Lock
FG001091
Figure 7
4. Allow engine to run at low idle for a minimum of five

minutes to allow engine to cool. If this is not done, heat
surge may occur.
HAOB290L
Figure 8

4-4
5. Shut down engine by turning key to "O" (OFF) position.
Remove key from starter switch. O I
WARNING
If engine must be run while performing maintenance,
use extreme care. Always have one person in the
cabin at all times. Never leave the cabin with the
engine running.
FG000175
Figure 9
6. Before starting maintenance work, hang up a tag, "Do Not

Touch When Performing Inspection or Maintenance" on
cabin door or work lever.
FG000401
Figure 10

4-5
TABLE OF RECOMMENDED
LUBRICANTS
IMPORTANT
It is highly recommend to use the Doosan Genuine
Products, or products which meet the specification below.
Using other products may damage the equipment.
NOTE: Refer to the Maintenance Intervals Table for

application points.
Ambient Temperature
Kind of -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104 122
Reservoir
Fluid °F
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 °C
SAE 10W-30
Engine Oil **
* SAE 10W-40
Pan Engine Oil
SAE 15W-40
Swing Drive SAE 90 and API GL5

Case
Gear Oil * SAE 80W-90 and API GL5
Final Drive
Case SAE 140 and API GL5
ISO VG 32
***
Hydraulic Oil
Hydraulic * ISO VG 46
Tank
Oil
ISO VG 68
* ASTM D975 No. 2

Fuel Tank Diesel Fuel
ASTM D975 No. 1

4-6
Grease
Grease * Multipurpose Lithium Grease NLGI No. 2
Fitting
Cooling Add Antifreeze

Coolant
System * (50% antifreeze - 50% distilled water)
* Installed at factory.
** Engine oil must meet ACEA-E5 or API-CI-4.
*** Hydraulic oil change interval is 2,000 hours, only when DOOSAN Genuine Oil is used. If other brands of
oil is used, guaranteed change interval is 1,000 hours. Note that the mixing ratio is for reference purpose
only, and is not an absolute standard.
API: American Petroleum Institute.
ACEA: Association des Constructeurs Europens d’Automobiles.
ASTM: American Society of Testing and Material.
ISO: International Standardization Organization.
NLGI: National Lubricating Grease Institute.
SAE: Society of Automotive Engineers.
CAUTION
Do not mix oils from different manufacturers. DOOSAN
does not endorse specific brands but does suggest that
owners select quality oils whose suppliers provide assurance
that required standards will always be met or exceeded.
IMPORTANT
Fluctuating daily or weekly extremes of temperature, or
operation in subzero freezing weather may make it
impractical to use straight weight lubricants. Use good
judgment in selecting lubricant types that are appropriate
for climate conditions.

4-7
FLUID CAPACITIES
Component Capacity
52 liters
Oil Pan with Filter
(13.7 U.S. gal.)
Engine
69 liters
Cooling System
(18.2 U.S. gal.)
900 liters
Fuel Tank
(237.8 U.S. gal.)
350 liters
Tank Level
(92.5 U.S. gal.)
Hydraulic Oil
790 liters
System
(208.7 U.S. gal.)
20 liters
Travel Reduction Device (Each)
(5.3 U.S. gal.)
6 liters
Swing Device (Each)
(1.6 U.S. gal.)
LUBRICATION AND SERVICE

CHART
Lubrication and service chart is on the inside of battery box
cover. The symbols shown here are used in the lubrication and
service chart on the next page.
Symbol Description Symbol Description
Lubrication Coolant
Gear Oil (Swing Device, Travel Device) Air Cleaner Element
Engine Oil Fuel Filter
Engine Oil Filter Air Conditioner Filter
Hydraulic Oil Drain Water
Hydraulic Oil Return Filter Fuel Cap Filter
Hydraulic Oil Tank Breather

4-8
4-9
Description of Lubrication and Service Chart
18 16 12 22 17 10 21
19 5
3
9 4
15
14
6
20 1
AUTO
10h
50h
250h
500h
1000h
2000h
8 13 11 7 2
FG015856
Figure 11

4-10
SERVICE DATA
Qty. Service Interval
No. Items to Check Service
10 50 250 500 1000 2000
1 Arm, Bucket Joint Pin Grease 11 F100 W10
2 Boom, Arm Joint Pin Grease 6 F100 W10
3 Swing Bearing Grease 5 W10
4 Swing Gear Grease 1
5 Swing Reduction Gear Grease 2 W10
Gear Oil
6 Swing Device 2X6 L V F
(80W90)
7 Track Spring Grease 2 W10
Gear Oil
8 Travel Reduction Device 2X20 L F, V
(80W90)
Engine Oil
9 Engine Oil 52 L V F
(10W40)
10 Hydraulic Oil Tank Hydraulic Oil 790 L V
11 Fuel Tank Diesel 900 L V
12 Fuel Prefilter Cartridge 2 V
13 Fuel Cap Filter Element 1
Coolant
14 Radiator 69 L V
(Antifreeze)
Hydraulic Oil Return Filter
15 Element 2(1) F
(Drain Return Filter)
16 Pilot Filter Element 1 F
Hydraulic Oil Suction
17 Strainer 1 C
Strainer
18 Engine Oil Filter Cartridge 2 F
19 Fuel Filter Cartridge 2
Air Cleaner (Outer) Element 1 C
20
Air Cleaner (Inner) Element 1
Air Conditioner Filter
Cartridge 1 C
(Outer)
21
Air Conditioner Filter
Cartridge 1 C
(Inner)
22 Air Breather Filter Cartridge 1
V: Maintenance and Refill.
C: Cleaning.
F: First Time Exchange Only.
F100: Every 10 Hours For First 100 Hours.
W10: Every 10 Hours If Operating In Water.
EG: Ethylene Glycol - Doosan Genuine Antifreeze Solution (Drain and replace using this interval.) See “Engine
Cooling System” on page 4-79, for further explanation.
PG: Propylene Glycol - Doosan Genuine Antifreeze Solution (Drain and replace using this interval.) See “Engine
Cooling System” on page 4-79, for further explanation.
: Replacement On Every Interval.
NOTE: For additional service items see list of “Maintenance Intervals” on page 4-12.

4-11
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
SERVICE ITEM PAGE
10 Hour / Daily Service
Grease Boom, Arm and Front Attachment Pins (for first 100 hours) 4-14
Check Engine Oil Level 4-14
Check Level of Hydraulic Oil Tank 4-15
Check for Leaks in Hydraulic System 4-16
Check Fuel Level 4-17
Check for Leaks in Fuel System 4-18
Check Fuel Prefilter and Drain Water As Required 4-18
Check Oil Level of Swing Reduction Device 4-19
Clean Dust Net in Front of Oil Cooler and Intercooler 4-20
Check Cooling System and Refill As Required 4-21
Check Level of Window Washer Liquid 4-21
Inspect the Bucket Teeth and Side Cutters for Signs of Wear 4-22
Inspect Engine Fan Blade 4-22
Check Air Intake System 4-23
Inspect Seat Belt for Proper Operation 4-23
Inspect the Structure for Cracks and Faulty Welds 4-23
Check the Operation of All Switches 4-23
Check the Operation of All Exterior Lights, Horn and Control Console Indicator and Monitor
4-24
Lights
Start Engine, Check Starting Ability, and Observe Exhaust Color at Start-up and at Normal
4-24
Operating Temperature. Listen for Any Abnormal Sounds
Check Operation of All Controls 4-24
50 Hour / Weekly Service
Perform All Daily Service Checks 4-25
Grease Arm and Bucket Joint Pins 4-25
Grease Swing Bearing (Only Manual Greasing) 4-26
Drain Water and Sediment from Fuel Tank 4-27
Check Engine Fan Belt for Cracks, Wear and Correct Tension (After First 50 Hours) 4-27
Change Engine Oil and Filter (After First 50 Hours) 4-27
Inspect the Track Assemblies for Proper Tension and Loose, Worn or Damaged Parts
4-27
(Links, Shoes, Rollers, Idlers)
250 Hour / Monthly Service
Perform All Daily and 50 Hour Service Checks 4-28
Grease Boom and Arm Joint Pins 4-28
Check Engine Fan Belt Tension 4-30
Check Engine Fan Belt Wear 4-31
Check Oil Level in Travel Reduction Device (One on Each Side of Unit) 4-32
Change Breaker Filter Element (Optional) 4-32
Change Swing Reduction Device Oil (Drain and Refill After First 250 Hours) 4-33
Change Oil in Travel Reduction Device (One on Each Side of Unit) (After First 250 Hours) 4-33
Replace Hydraulic Oil Return Filter (After First 250 Hours) 4-33
Change Pilot Filter (After First 250 Hours) 4-33

4-12
Inspect Pins and Bushings of the Front End Attachments for Signs of Wear 4-33
Check Fluid Levels in Batteries and Battery Charge Levels 4-33
Inspect for Any Loose or Missing Nuts and Bolts 4-33
Inspect Fuel System Hose Clamps 4-33
500 Hour / 3 Month Service
Perform All Daily, 50 and 250 Hour Service Checks 4-34
Grease Swing Gear and Pinion 4-34
Change Engine Oil and Filter 4-35
Clean Air-Conditioning Outer Filter 4-36
Check and Clean Air-Conditioning Inner Filter 4-37
Clean Radiator, Oil Cooler, Intercooler, Fuel Cooler and Air Conditioner Condenser Core 4-38
Clean Outer Filter of Air Cleaner 4-39
Change of Fuel Prefilter 4-41
Change Fuel Filter 4-42
1,000 Hour / 6 Month service
Perform All Daily, 50, 250 and 500 Hour Service Checks 4-43
Grease Swing Reduction Device 4-43
Replace Hydraulic Oil Return Filter, Drain Return Filter 4-44
Change Pilot Filter 4-45
Change Oil in Travel Reduction Device (One on Each Side of Unit) 4-46
Change Air Breather Filter 4-46
Change Air-Conditioning Outer Filter 4-47
Change Fuel Cap Filter 4-48
Check Air Conditioner Refrigerant 4-50
Check and Adjust Engine ** 4-50
2,000 Hour / Yearly Service
Perform All Daily, 50, 250, 500 and 1,000 Hour Service Checks 4-51
Change Swing Reduction Device Oil 4-51
Replace Outer and Inner Air Cleaner Elements 4-52
Change Radiator Coolant 4-53
Hydraulic Oil Exchange and Suction Strainer Cleaning 4-55
Check Alternator and Starter** 4-57
Check All Rubber Antivibration Shock Mounts 4-57
Perform and Record the Results of the Cycle Time Tests 4-57
Inspect Machine to Check for Cracked or Broken Welds or other Structural Damage 4-57
Check, Adjust Valve Clearance ** 4-57
Check Head Bolt Torques 4-57
4,000 Hour / Biennial Service
Major Parts - Periodic Replacement 4-58
12,000 Hour / Year Service
Hose In-service Lifetime Limit (European Standard ISO 8331 and EN982 CEN) 4-59
** These checks need to be completed by an authorized DOOSAN dealer.

4-13
10 HOUR / DAILY SERVICE
Grease Boom, Arm and Front Attachment

Pins (for first 100 hours)
WARNING
Do not remove the grease fitting until the pressure is
entirely bleed off by loosening grease fitting slowly to avoid
fatal wound.
Let anybody never be in the blowing direction. FG000500
Figure 12
Be careful to any kinds of works for nipples and hydraulic
line plugs.
Grease every 10 hours for first 100 hours and every 50 or 250
hours thereafter (See page 4-25).
NOTE: If the unit has been running or working in water the
front attachment should be greased on a 10 hour /
daily basis.
Check Engine Oil Level 2
WARNING
Allow the engine to cool before checking the oil level to
avoid burns by touching hot engine parts. 1
NOTE: When checking level using a dipstick always remove

and wipe it clean before making final level check.
1. Shut down engine and wait for fifteen minutes. This will
allow all oil to drain back to oil pan. FG016101
2. Remove dipstick (1, Figure 13) and wipe the oil off with a Figure 13
clean cloth.
3. Insert dipstick fully in the oil gauge tube, then take it out
again.
4. Engine oil level must be between "HIGH" and "LOW"
marks on dipstick. H
NOTE: If oil is above "HIGH" mark on dipstick, some

must be drained to return oil to proper level. L
5. Add oil through engine oil fill cap (2, Figure 13), if the oil
level is below the "LOW" mark.
FG000616
Figure 14

4-14
Check Level of Hydraulic Oil Tank
WARNING
The hydraulic oil will be hot after normal machine
operation. Allow the system to cool before attempting to
service any of the hydraulic components.
The hydraulic tank is pressurized. Lift the breather cap
slowly to allow the pressurized air to vent. After the ARO1760L
pressure has been released, it is safe to remove either the Figure 15
fill cap or service covers.
1. Position the machine on firm, level ground. Lower boom

and position bucket on ground as shown in Figure 16.
2. Set engine speed to "LOW IDLE".
FG015794
Figure 16
3. Check level gauge on the right access door. Oil level must
be between marks on sight gauge.
H
L
FG015795
Figure 17
4. If the level is below "L" mark add oil.

A. Shut down engine.
B. The hydraulic tank is pressurized. Lift the breather
cap slowly to allow the pressurized air to vent.
C. Remove the upper cover of the hydraulic tank and
add oil.
IMPORTANT
FG015796
Do not fill above "H" mark on sight gauge. Overfilling Figure 18
can result in damage to equipment and oil leaking
from hydraulic tank due to expansion.

4-15
5. If oil level is above the "H" mark drain oil.
A. Shut down engine and wait for the hydraulic oil to
cool down.
B. Drain the excess oil from drain plug (Figure 19) at the
bottom of the tank into a suitable container, using a
hose at the point (plug).
NOTE: Dispose of drained fluids according to local
regulations.
FG015797
Figure 19
Check for Leaks in Hydraulic System

1. Perform a daily walk-around inspection to make sure that
the hoses, piping, fittings, cylinders and hydraulic motors
are not showing any signs of leakage. If any is noted,
determine the source of the leak and repair.

4-16
Check Fuel Level
2
WARNING
Use extreme safety precautions while refueling to prevent
explosions or fire.
Immediately clean up any split fuel.
1
1. At end of each work day, fill fuel tank. Add fuel through fuel
fill tube (1, Figure 20). When working at a temperature of FG015798
0°C (32°F) or higher, use ASTM No. 2-D or its equivalent. Figure 20
At temperatures below 0°C (32°F) use ASTM No. 1-D or its
equivalent.
2. Make sure that the fuel fill hose is grounded to the
excavator before fueling begins.
3. Check the amount of fuel in the tank by observing the fuel
tank sight gauge (2, Figure 20).
NOTE: See “Fluid Capacities” on page 4-8. for capacity.
4. The excavator may be equipped with the optional battery
operated fuel fill pump. The pump assembly is in the
hydraulic pump compartment. Put the suction hose of the
pump into the fuel resupply tank. Turn the switch in the
pump compartment "ON", and the fuel will be pumped into
the excavator fuel tank.
NOTE: See “Fuel Transfer Pump (Optional)” on
page 4-84, for further information.
5. Do not overfill the tank.
6. Securely tighten cap after fueling.
NOTE: 1. If breather holes (Figure 21) in cap are
clogged, a vacuum may form in the tank
preventing proper fuel flow to engine. Keep
holes in fuel cap clean.
2. Please change the inner filter of cap per
every 1,000 hr.
FG015799
Figure 21

4-17
Check for Leaks in Fuel System
1. Perform an inspection of the engine compartment to verify
that the fuel system is not leaking. If any is noted,
determine the source of the leak and repair.
Check Fuel Prefilter and Drain Water As

Required
NOTE: If water in fuel warning light (Figure 21) on instrument
panel comes "ON", drain the collected water in fuel
prefilter.
FG013894
Figure 22
1. A fuel prefilter is inside the left rear side access door.

2. Open the access door on left rear side of the machine.
FG015800
Figure 23
3. It is necessary to drain the collected water if the bowl is full

of water or sediment.
4. Position a small container under fuel prefilter. Drain water
or sediment by opening drain valve (2, Figure 24) on
bottom of bowl (1).
1
regulations. 2
5. Close drain valve.

open close
FG000438
Figure 24

4-18
Check Oil Level of Swing Reduction
Device
2
WARNING
2
The gear oil is very hot after the machine has been
operating. Shut all systems down and allow them to cool.
Before fully removing any motor case inspection port plug, 1
etc., loosen the plug slightly to allow pressurized air to
escape.
1
NOTE:When checking level using a dipstick always
remove and wipe it clean before making final FG015801
level check. Figure 25
1. Remove dipstick (1, Figure 25) and wipe the oil from the
dipstick with a cloth.
2. Insert dipstick (1, Figure 25) fully into dipstick tube.
3. When dipstick is pulled out, oil level must be between
"HIGH" and "LOW" marks on dipstick.
NOTE: If oil is above "HIGH" mark on dipstick, some H
must be drained to proper level.
4. If the oil does not reach the "L" mark on the dipstick, add oil L
through fill port (2, Figure 25).
FG000419
Figure 26
5. If the oil level exceeds the "H" mark on the dipstick, release
the drain plug (Figure 27). Drain the excessive oil into a
suitable container.
regulations.
FG015802
Figure 27

4-19
Clean Dust Net in Front of Oil Cooler and
Intercooler
IMPORTANT
If running excavator in dusty area, check dust net
everyday and clean it if dirty.
WARNING
If using compressed air or water to clean the dust net, make
sure that proper eye protection is worn.
WARNING
There should be no person in front of the fan in order to
keep persons from being injured by scatterd material.
1. Check the radiator grille contamination condition. If it is still

severely contaminated, loosen wing bolt(s) and remove
dust net.
2. Use compressed air or water to clean the core. FG016102
Figure 28
WARNING
If using compressed air or water to clean the dust net,
make sure that proper eye protection is worn.

4-20
Check Cooling System and Refill As
Required
WARNING
Allow the engine to cool before releasing the radiator cap.
Make sure to loosen the cap slowly to release any
remaining pressure.
Radiator cleaning is performed while the engine is running.
Take extreme caution when working on or near a running
engine. Make sure to lock out and tag the controls notifying
personnel that service work is being performed.
Do not remove the radiator cap unless it is required.
Observe the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank.
NOTE: Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene glycol

antifreeze together. If the two are mixed, the
protection level will be reduced to the level of the
ethylene glycol.
1. When the engine is cold, remove the radiator cap and
check the coolant level inside the engine room. Do not rely
on the level of coolant in the coolant recovery tank. Refill
radiator as required. Refer to coolant concentration table.
(See page 4-83) (2 Reserve tank)
2. Check to make sure that the coolant transfer line from the
coolant recovery tank to the radiator is free and clear of
obstructions, or not pinched.
3. Observe the level of coolant in the coolant recovery tank.
The normal cold engine fluid level should be between FG016103
"FULL" and "LOW" marks on tank.
Figure 29
4. If the coolant is below the "LOW" mark, add coolant to this
tank.
Check Level of Window Washer Liquid

1. Open left front access door and check fluid level in
windshield washer tank.
2. Open fill cap and add fluid.
NOTE: Use a washer liquid that is rated for all seasons.
This will prevent freezing during cold weather
operation.
FG016104
Figure 30

4-21
Inspect the Bucket Teeth and Side Cutters
for Signs of Wear
1. On a daily basis, inspect the bucket teeth to make sure that
tooth wear or breakage has not developed.
2. Do not allow the replaceable bucket teeth to wear down to
the point that the bucket adapter is exposed. See Figure
31.
NOTE: These instructions are only for DOOSAN OEM
buckets. If you are using other manufacturers'
buckets, refer to their specific instructions. Figure 31 1. POINT, 2. ADAPTER and 3.
PIN
Inspect Engine Fan Blade
WARNING
Personal injury can result from a fan blade failure. Never
pull or pry on the fan. This can damage the fan blade(s) and
cause fan failure.
NOTE: Manually rotate the crankshaft by using a wrench on

the accessory drive pulley nut.
Figure 32
1. An inspection of the cooling fan is required daily. Check for
cracks, loose bolts, bent or loose blades, and for contact
between the blade tips and the fan shroud. Check the fan
to make sure it is securely mounted. Tighten the bolts if
necessary. Replace any fan that is damage.

4-22
Check Air Intake System
CAUTION
Hot engine components can cause burns.
Avoid contact with hot engine components
1. Park the machine on a level surface, lower the attachment

to the ground, set safety lever to "LOCK" position, and shut HAOA050L
down engine. Figure 33
2. Check the engine intake hose, and hose bands for damage
and tightness.
3. If damaged, wrinkled, or loose, replace or retighten or
contact your nearest DOOSAN dealer.
IMPORTANT
Severe engine damage will result from running with
unfiltered air.
Do not operate engine if any leaks or defects are found
on air intake system.
FG016105
Figure 34
Inspect Seat Belt for Proper Operation
Inspect the Structure for Cracks and

Faulty Welds
1. During the daily walk-around inspection and when
greasing the machine, look for any visible damage to the
machine. Repair or replace any damaged parts before
operating the machine.
Check the Operation of All Switches

1. Verify the working condition of all switches before starting
the engine.

4-23
Check the Operation of All Exterior Lights,
Horn and Control Console Indicator
and Monitor Lights
1. Turn engine starter switch to the "I" (ON) position and
observe all of the indicator lights.
2. Restore operation of any light bulbs that do not turn "ON"
at this time.
3. Sound the horn. Repair or replace if required.
4. Turn "ON" and inspect all exterior work lights. Replace any
monitors, burned out bulbs or cracked or broken housings
or lenses.
Start Engine, Check Starting Ability, and

Observe Exhaust Color at Start-up and
at Normal Operating Temperature.
Listen for Any Abnormal Sounds
Check Operation of All Controls
IMPORTANT
Cold weather operation requires that the operator fully
warm up the hydraulic oil before beginning machine
operation. Follow all warm up instructions listed in the
Operating Instruction section of this manual. Make sure to
cycle oil through all of the components, including all
cylinders, both travel motors and the swing motor. Cold
hydraulic oil in the lines and components needs to be
warmed before beginning full operation. If this is not done,
damage to the cylinders or hydraulic motors can occur.
1. With the engine at rated speed, operate all of the controls.

2. Follow cold weather hydraulic system warm-up
procedures.
3. Note any slow operations or unusual movements.
Determine the cause and repair the fault before operating.

4-24
50 HOUR / WEEKLY SERVICE
Perform All Daily Service Checks
Grease Arm and Bucket Joint Pins

Grease every 10 hours for first 100 hours and every 50 hours
thereafter.
front attachment should be pressed on "Auto
Greasing Manual Button" (Manual Operating Switch
of Auto Greasing Device) a 10 hour / daily basis.
• Position machine as shown below and lower the front
attachment to the ground. (at the engine "ON")
• Press the grease fitting and inject grease with the
grease gun on the marked point. Please check the
marked point of greasig.
• After injection, clean off the old grease that has been
purged.
D B, E C A
FG015803
Figure 35
Reference Reference
Number Number
A Arm Link Joint Pin (1 Point) D Bucket Link Joint Pin (1 Point)
B Link Joint Pin (2 Points) E Bucket Cylinder Rod Pin (1 Point)
C Arm Bucket Joint Pin (1 Point)

4-25
A. Arm link joint pin (1 point)
B. Link joint pin (2 points)
C. Arm bucket joint pin (1 point)
D. Bucket link joint pin (1 point)
E. Bucket cylinder rod pin (1 point)
A
C
FG016128
Figure 36
E
B
B
D
FG016129
Figure 37
Grease Swing Bearing (Only Manual

Greasing)
1. Position the machine on firm, level ground. Lower the front
attachment to the ground and shut down engine.
2. There are three grease fittings for the swing bearing. Do
not over lubricate. Purge old grease with new. Remove all
purged grease.
FG016197
Figure 38

4-26
Drain Water and Sediment from Fuel Tank
1. Perform this procedure before operating the machine.
2. Drain water and sediment from bottom of fuel tank into a
suitable container.
NOTE: Dispose of drained fluid according to local
regulations.
NOTE: Always completely fill fuel tank at end of each
workday to prevent condensation from forming
on the inside walls of the tank. FG016106
Figure 39
Check Engine Fan Belt for Cracks, Wear

and Correct Tension (After First 50
Hours)
1. Inspect after first 50 hours of operation and every 250
hours thereafter. For details, See “Check Engine Fan Belt
Tension” on page 4-30.
Change Engine Oil and Filter (After First 50

Hours)
1. Change engine oil and filter after first 50 hours of operation
or rebuild, then every 500 thereafter. For details, See
“Change Engine Oil and Filter” on page 4-35.
Inspect the Track Assemblies for Proper

Tension and Loose, Worn or Damaged
Parts (Links, Shoes, Rollers, Idlers)
1. Do a daily walk-around inspection of all components
including the track assemblies. Look for missing, damaged
or excessively worn parts. See “Track Tension” on
page 4-87.
2. Jack up each track and perform the two speed travel motor
test.

4-27
250 HOUR / MONTHLY SERVICE
Perform All Daily and 50 Hour Service

Checks
Grease Boom and Arm Joint Pins

Grease every 10 hours for first 100 hours and check the marked
point of greasing every 250 hours thereafter.
front attachment should be pressed on "Auto
Greasing Manual Button" (Manual Operating Switch
of Auto Greasing Device) a 10 hour / daily basis.
• Position machine as shown below and lower the front
attachment to the ground. (at the engine "ON")
• Press the grease fitting and inject grease with the
grease gun on the marked point. Please check the
marked point of greasig.
• After injection, clean off the old grease that has been
purged.
B,C,D
A G
FG015804
Figure 40
Reference Reference
Number Number
A Boom Cylinder Head Pin (2 Points) E Boom Arm Joint Pin (2 Points)
B Boom Foot Pin (2 Points) F Arm Cylinder Rod Pin (1 Point)
C Boom Cylinder Rod Pin (2 Points) G Bucket Cylinder Head Pin (1 Point)
D Arm Cylinder Head Pin (1 Point)

4-28
A. Boom cylinder head pin (2 points)
A A
FG016176
Figure 41
B. Boom foot pin (2 points)

C D
C. Boom cylinder rod pin (2 points)
D. Arm cylinder head pin (1 point) C
B B
FG016130
Figure 42
E. Boom arm joint pin (2 points)

F. Arm cylinder rod pin (1 point)
E
G. Bucket cylinder head pin (1 point)
G
E
F
FG016131
Figure 43

4-29
Check Engine Fan Belt Tension
IMPORTANT Alternator
Water
A loose fan belt can cause engine overheating, poor Pump Idle Pulley
charging, and/or premature belt wear. A belt that is too tight
can cause damage to the water pump, alternator bearing or
belt.
CRS Compressor
1. Inspect every 250 hours. (Inspect after first 50 hours of Pulley
operation.)
2. With the engine shut off, check the tension of the fan belt
by pressing downwards on the belt, midway between the
fan pulley and alternator pulley. The belt should flex Water
Alternator
approximately 6 - 8 mm (0.24 - 0.31 in). See Figure 44. To Pump
adjust the belt, loosen the alternator adjustment plate bolts,
adjust the belt tension and retighten the bolts.
CRS 6 - 8 mm (0.24 - 0.31 in)/
Pulley 10 kg (22 Ib)
FG016161
Figure 44

4-30
Check Engine Fan Belt Wear
WARNING
Keep clear of engine fan and fan drive belts when the
engine is running. Rotating fan and belt contact can cause
injury.
FG016132
WARNING Figure 45
When checking, adjusting or replacing drive belts, care

must be taken to prevent accidental cranking of the engine.
Be sure the starter switch is in the "OFF" position and the
controls are tagged.
1. Replace badly worn, greasy or severely cracked belts

immediately. These conditions prevent proper belt
function. Visually inspect the belt. Check the belt for
intersecting cracks. Transverse (across the belt width)
cracks are acceptable. Longitudinal (direction of belt
length) cracks that intersect with transverse cracks are not
acceptable. Replace the belt if it is frayed or has pieces of
material missing.
2. Before installing new belts, make sure all pulley grooves
are clean and not worn. Replace pulley, if damaged, or if
the grooves are worn.
3. All pulley support bearings, shafts, and brackets must be in
working order.
4. When replacing belts and pulleys, pulley alignment must
be checked with belts tensioned and brackets securely
clamped. A misalignment that can be detected by the
naked eye is detrimental to belt performance.
5. Do not force the belts into the pulley grooves by prying with
a screwdriver or pry bar. This will damage the belt side
cords which will cause the belts to turn and result in
complete destruction of the belts in operation.
6. Belts on new machines and replacement belts lose their
tension as they seat into the pulley grooves. Check the
tension of new belts at 50 hour intervals until tension is
stabilized and thereafter, every 250 hours. If the tension
falls below the required minimum, the belt slips damaging
the belts and pulley grooves.
NOTE: When operating in abrasive conditions, check
tension every 100 hours.

4-31
Check Oil Level in Travel Reduction
Device (One on Each Side of Unit)
WARNING 1
The gear oil is very hot after the machine has been operating.
Shut all systems down and allow them to cool. Before fully
removing any motor case inspection port plug, etc., loosen
the plug slightly to allow pressurized air to escape. 2 FG016109
1. Make sure that the machine is on firm, level ground. Figure 46
2. Rotate the track until ports (1 thru 3, Figure 46) are in their
proper positions as shown.
3. Loosen fill plug (3, Figure 46) slightly to allow pressurized
air to escape.
4. Remove oil level plug (1, Figure 46).
5. Check oil level. The oil should be near the bottom of the
level plug opening.
6. Add oil through the fill plug (3, Figure 46) opening, if
necessary.
7. Clean and install oil level and fill plugs (1 and 3, Figure 46).
8. Repeat this procedure on the other travel reduction device.
Change Breaker Filter Element (Optional)
WARNING
The hydraulic oil will be hot after normal machine operation.
Allow the system to cool down before changing pilot filter.

attachment to the ground and shut down engine. FG016133
2. Loosen the hydraulic oil tank breather cap to release Figure 47
pressure.
3. Locate breaker filter assembly (Figure 47).
4. Position a container under the filter assembly. Remove the
drain plug and completely drain the assembly.
5. Using a 30 mm spanner, unscrew filter housing from filter
bottom.
6. Remove O-ring from filter head.
7. Replace filter.
8. Apply a small amount of oil around the entire O-ring and
install the filter housing on the filter head.
NOTE: Tightening torque: 27 kg•m (265 Nm, 195 ft lb)
9. Install drain plug in bottom of filter housing.
10. After changing breaker filter, vent air from pump and check
level of hydraulic oil tank.

4-32
Change Swing Reduction Device Oil (Drain
and Refill After First 250 Hours)
NOTE: Change swing reduction device oil after first 250
hours on a new machine and every 2,000 hours
thereafter (See page 4-51).
Change Oil in Travel Reduction Device

(One on Each Side of Unit) (After First
250 Hours)
NOTE: Drain and refill oil after first 250 hours of operation or
rebuild, and every 1,000 hours thereafter (See page
4-46).
Replace Hydraulic Oil Return Filter (After

First 250 Hours)
NOTE: Replace hydraulic oil return filter after first 250 hours
of operation or rebuild, then every 1,000 hours
thereafter (See page 4-44).
Change Pilot Filter (After First 250 Hours)

NOTE: Change pilot filter after first 250 hours and every
1000 hours thereafter (See page 4-45).
Inspect Pins and Bushings of the Front

End Attachments for Signs of Wear
Check Fluid Levels in Batteries and

Battery Charge Levels
Inspect for Any Loose or Missing Nuts and

Bolts
Inspect Fuel System Hose Clamps

4-33
500 HOUR / 3 MONTH SERVICE
Perform All Daily, 50 and 250 Hour Service

Checks
Grease Swing Gear and Pinion
WARNING
Greasing swing gear and pinion must be serviced by only
one person.
1. Remove inspection cover and inspect the condition of the

grease. Make sure that water or other contaminants are
not noticeable.
NOTE: The upper structure must be rotated a little at a
time so that the entire face of the swing gear
can be lubricated. Use extreme caution when
performing this operation.
FG016177
Figure 48
2. If water or other contaminations are found, remove the

lower access cover so that the gear teeth can be
thoroughly cleaned and lubricated.
3. Install access covers after lubricating gear teeth.
FG000148
Figure 49

4-34
Change Engine Oil and Filter
NOTE: Change engine oil and filter after first 50 hours of
operation or rebuild, then every 500 thereafter.
WARNING
DO NOT change oil on a hot engine. Allow the engine to
cool down before attempting to change the engine oil and
filter to avoid burns by touching hot engine parts.
1. Position a larger container under the engine. Remove cap

(1, Figure 50) and install hose (2) to drain the engine oil.
Remove hose (2) and install cap (1).
regulations. 1
FG016110
Figure 50
2. Replace engine oil filter by using filter wrench. The engine

oil filter is a spin-on type. See Figure 51. Remove and
discard filter.
3. Install new filter. Apply a small amount of oil around filter
gasket. Screw filter on head until gasket contacts head,
turn filter 1/2 turn more.
FG016111
Figure 51
4. Refill the engine with the correct oil through the oil fill port
(Figure 52). Refer to the Lubrication Table of this manual
for the recommended oil for the operating conditions.
5. Start engine. Run engine for five minutes at "LOW IDLE",
and check engine oil pressure light.
6. Shut down engine. Look for signs of leaks at filter. Recheck
oil level after fifteen minutes.
FG016112
Figure 52

4-35
Clean Air-Conditioning Outer Filter
The unit is equipped with an air filtration system which filters out
dirt and dust particles from air being circulated into operator's
cabin. This filter should be cleaned out.
NOTE: In the event that the unit is being operated in a dusty
environment, the cleaning and replacement should
be performed more frequently. If filter is damaged,
replace damaged filter with a new one.
WARNING
All service and inspection of air-conditioning system
should be performed with the starter switch in the "O"
(OFF) position.
WARNING
If using compressed air to clean the element, make sure
that proper eye protection is worn. Cover
NOTE: All right and left call outs are based on the operator
being seated in the operator's seat facing the front.
1. Open the door in the left front of the machine, then remove
the cover (1, Figure 53) by loosening the four wing bolts. FG016162
Figure 53
2. Open the cover by turning the knob (1, Figure 54) in the
rear of the cabin.
FG000441
Figure 54
3. Remove filter (Figure 55) and inspect for any damage.

4. Use compressed air to clean filter. If filter is still dirty, then
change to new one.
5. Reassemble in reverse order.
FG000342
Figure 55

4-36
Check and Clean Air-Conditioning Inner
Filter
WARNING
should be performed with the starter switch in the "O"
(OFF) position.
WARNING
FG000422
If using compressed air to clean the element, make sure Figure 56
that proper eye protection is worn.
1. Remove the filter by pulling out ward the knob while

pressing the upper part and lower part of the filter handle
which is inside of the left rear part of the cabin.
2. Use compressed air in the clean filter. If the filter is
damaged replaced by a new one.
If the filter is very dirty use a mild soap or detergent and
water to clean it.
IMPORTANT
If water was used to clean filter, be certain it is
completely dry before installing.

4-37
Clean Radiator, Oil Cooler, Intercooler,
Fuel Cooler and Air Conditioner
Condenser Core
WARNING
If compressed air, steam or water hit your body directly,
there is danger of injury. Always wear protective glasses,
mask and safety shoes during the cleaning precess. Make
sure that all extra personnel are clear of the work area.
1. Open the rear left door and engine cover. FG016114

Figure 57
2. Loosen the wing bolt(s) and remove dust net from in front
of oil cooler and intercooler.
3. Clean the outside of the radiator and oil cooler, intercooler
and fuel cooler with compressed air, steam or water. Wash
from the outside of the engine compartment inwards.
Repeat the cleaning process from the inside of the engine
compartment outwards to remove all dirt and debris.
NOTE: Clean dust net and install it after cleaning
radiator, oil cooler, intercooler and fuel cooler.
4. Clean air conditioner condenser core with compressed air,
steam or water.
FG016102
IMPORTANT Figure 58
To prevent damage to the cores, apply compressed air

from an appropriated distance. Damaged core may
cause water leakage or overheating. In a dusty site,
check the core daily, irrespective of the maintenance
interval.

4-38
Clean Outer Filter of Air Cleaner
NOTE: Clean outer filter every 500 hours / 3 months of
service.
NOTE: If air cleaner clogged warning light (Figure 59)
on instrument panel comes "ON" the air cleaner
must be serviced.
NOTE: When working in severely dusty conditions, the
PWR
service interval should be shortened.
FG013734
Figure 59
WARNING
Never clean or attempt to remove the air cleaner filter if the
engine is running.
If using compressed air to clean the filter, make sure that
proper eye protection is worn.
1. Locate the air cleaner assembly.

NOTE: When it reaches every 500 hours or If indicator
light (Figure 59) on instrument panel comes
"ON" the air cleaner must be serviced.
2
NOTE: Replace outer filter after cleaning 5 times or
every 2,000 hours / 1 year of service.
2. Remove and clean rubber evacuator valve (1, Figure 60)
from bottom of air cleaner housing cover (2). Inspect seal 1
lips for wear or damage. Replace valve if necessary.
FG016134
NOTE: Install evacuator valve with lips parallel to the
Figure 60
cover.
3. Remove the access cover (2, Figure 61) by loosening the

latches
4. Remove the outer filter (3, Figure 61) from the housing. Do
not remove inner filter (4). 4
3
2
1
FG016115
Figure 61

4-39
5. Clean the outer filter (3, Figure 61) by blowing compressed
air from the inside of the filter towards the outside. Do not
use more than 205 kPa (30 psi) air pressure.
HAOC570L
Figure 62
6. Check outer filter by shinning a light through it. If small

holes or thinner parts are found on the element after
cleaning it, replace the filter.
7. Clean the inside of the air cleaner body and the inside of
the air cleaner cover. Do not use compressed air.
8. Properly install the air filter and cover.
9. After filter service be sure to install cover with arrows
pointing "UP".
NOTE: If after cleaning the outer filter, the air cleaner
FG000412
clogged indicator remains "ON", replace the
Figure 63
outer and inner filters. Do not clean inner filter.

4-40
Change of Fuel Prefilter
1. Open the left rear side door to access fuel prefilter.
2. Position a small container under prefilter. Drain fuel by
opening drain valve on bottom of filter.
regulations.
FG015800
Figure 64
3. Remove the bowl using supplied tool.

4. Remove the cartridge.
FG016116
Figure 65
5. Coat surface of packing (2, Figure 66) with fuel on new

cartridge (1).
6. Tighten the cartridge by hand until the packing comes into
contact with the surface of the filter housing head.
7. When it reach the surface, tighten the cartridge about 3/4 2
of a turn more.
8. Coat surface of seal (3, Figure 66) with fuel, and tighten
the bowl with tool.
1
FG000428
Figure 66

4-41
Change Fuel Filter
WARNING
Exchange filter after waiting for engine to cool. Be careful of
fire hazards. Do not smoke.
1. Locate fuel filter inside engine compartment.

2. Position a small container under fuel filter. FG016135
Figure 67
3. Unscrew fuel filter from head assembly. Discard fuel filter.

regulations.
4. Change new O-ring in the filter cases.
5. After cleaning filter head, install new fuel filter. Screw filter
on head until gasket contacts head, and turn filter 1/4 turn
more with a filter wrench.
NOTE: Coat fuel filter gasket with fuel.
NOTE: Fill fuel filter with clean fuel. This will help
reduce fuel system priming. FG016178
Figure 68
Fuel System Priming

1
If air remains in the fuel inlet line to the engine, it may cause the
engine to run in an abnormal condition. Air may impact the 2
starting capability of the engine, and may also result in surging
engine speeds.
If the machine happens to have run out of fuel, or if the fuel filter
has been replaced, air may need to be bleed using the following
procedure:
1. Shut down engine.
FG000431
2. Loosen plug (1, Figure 69) on the fuel prefilter head.
Figure 69
3. Pump the hand operated primer pump (2, Figure 69) on the
fuel prefilter. Pump primer until fuel is present at plug hole
in fuel prefilter head.
4. Tighten plug (1, Figure 69) in fuel prefilter head.
5. Continue to pump primer pump until a strong resistance is
felt.
6. Start engine and look for signs of leaks.
7. Repeat procedure if necessary.

4-42
1,000 HOUR / 6 MONTH SERVICE
Perform All Daily, 50, 250 and 500 Hour

Service Checks
Grease Swing Reduction Device

2. Remove air vent plug (1, Figure 70) from swing reduction
device. (at manual gerasing ports)
1
1
FG001564
Figure 70
3. Press grease fitting and inject grease with the grease gun
on the marked point (2, Figure 71).
4. Install air vent plug (1, Figure 70) in swing reduction
device.
2 2
FG016198
Figure 71

4-43
Replace Hydraulic Oil Return Filter, Drain
Return Filter
NOTE: Change hydraulic oil return filter after first 250 hours
of operation or rebuild, and every 1,000 hours
thereafter.
NOTE: If return filter clogged warning light (Figure 72) on
instrument panel comes "ON" the return filter must be
serviced.
FG013832
Figure 72
WARNING 2
3
1
The hydraulic tank is pressurized. Lift the hydraulic
breather cap slightly to allow the pressurized air to vent.
After the pressure has been released, it is safe to remove
either the fill cap or service covers or drain water from the FG016117
tank. Figure 73
IMPORTANT 3 4 6
Make sure to clean any dirt or water from the top of the
7
hydraulic tank, especially around the fill port and filter
ports.
5

8
2. Lift the breather cap (1, Figure 73) slightly to release the
internal pressure.
3. Remove bolts (2, Figure 73) and service cover (3).
Remove spring (4), valve (5) O-ring (6), and bypass
strainer (7), and then filter (8).
4. Remove filter and discard.
NOTE: Used filter should always be disposed of
according to local regulations. FG000761
5. Install new filter and a new O-ring. Install bypass strainer, Figure 74
valve and spring. Install service cover plate.
6. Tighten the breather cap (1, Figure 73).
7. Run engine for ten minutes at low idle to purge air from
circuit.
8. Check level in hydraulic oil tank (See page 4-15). Add oil if
necessary.

4-44
Change Pilot Filter
NOTE: Change pilot filter after first 250 hours of operation or
rebuild, and every 1,000 hours thereafter.
NOTE: If pilot filter clogged warning light (Figure 75) on
instrument panel comes "ON" the pilot filter must be
serviced.
FG013895
Figure 75
WARNING
operation.
Allow the system to cool down before changing pilot filter.

FG016136
2. Lift the breather cap (1, Figure 73) slightly to release the Figure 76
internal pressure.
3. Locate pilot system filter assembly. See Figure 76.
4. Unscrew canister (5, Figure 77) and remove O-ring (3) and
filter cartridge (4).
NOTE: The canister will be filled with oil. Use caution 1
2
when removing this assembly. 3
5. Insert a new filter cartridge and O-ring. Apply a small
amount of oil around the entire O-ring and install the 4
canister assembly onto the filter head (1, Figure 77).
according to local regulations. 5
FG000323
6. After changing pilot filter, vent air from pump and check
Figure 77
level of hydraulic oil tank.

4-45
Change Oil in Travel Reduction Device
(One on Each Side of Unit)
WARNING 1
The gear oil is very hot after the machine has been
Before fully removing any motor case, inspection port plug,
etc., loosen the plug slightly to allow pressurized air to 2 FG016109
escape. Figure 78
NOTE: Drain oil after first 250 hours of operation or rebuild,

and every 1,000 hours thereafter.
1. Make sure that the machine is on firm, level ground.
2. Rotate the track until ports (1 thru 3, Figure 78) are in their
proper positions as shown.
3. Place a container under drain plug (2, Figure 78) and
remove plugs (1 thru 3) to drain the travel reduction gear
oil.
regulations.
4. Install drain plug (2, Figure 78). Refill the travel reduction
gear case with fluid through fill port (3) until the fluid level is
at port (1). Install level plug (1) and fill plug (3).
5. Repeat this procedure on the other travel reduction device.
Change Air Breather Filter 1

2
2. Lift the breather cap(2. Figure 79) slightly to release the
internal pressure.
3. Unscrew the bolt (1, Figure 79) and take off the breather
cap (2, Figure 79). 3
4. Change a filter cartridge (3, Figure 79) and assemble the

breather cap by tighting the bolt.
according to local regulations.
FG013207
Figure 79

4-46
Change Air-Conditioning Outer Filter
The unit is equipped with an air filtration system which filters out
dirt and dust particles from air being circulated into operator's
cabin. This filter should be cleaned out.
NOTE: In the event that the unit is being operated in a dusty
environment, the cleaning and replacement should
be performed more frequently. If filter is damaged,
replace damaged filter with a new one.
WARNING
should be performed with the starter switch in the "O" Cover
(OFF) position.
NOTE: All right and left call outs are based on the operator
being seated in the operator's seat facing the front.
1. Open the door in the left front of the machine, then remove FG016162
four wing bolts and washers, and access cover (1, Figure 80). Figure 80
2. Open the cover by unscrewing the knob (1, Figure 81) in

the rear of the cabin.
FG000441
Figure 81
3. Remove filter (Figure 82) and replace with new one.

4. Reassemble in reverse order.
FG000342
Figure 82

4-47
Change Fuel Cap Filter
WARNING
External shock or damages to fuel cap may lead to
permanent damage to filter.
FG015720
Figure 83
1. See under the fuel cap as shown on (Figure 84). Rotate

bolt to CCW direction to loosen.
FG015684
Figure 84
2. After disengaging it as shown on (Figure 85), carefully lay it

on floor.
FG015685
Figure 85
3. After disengaging, disengage rubber as shown on (Figure

86).
FG015686
Figure 86

4-48
4. After disengaging as shown on (Figure 86), you may now
exchange it to a new filter as shown on (Figure 87).
FG015687
Figure 87
5. After exchanging to a new filter, you may now assemble

back in reverse order.
FG015688
Figure 88

4-49
Check Air Conditioner Refrigerant
WARNING
Mixing of tobacco smoke and freon is deadly.
Do not smoke while servicing or recharging
air-conditioning system.
1. Run engine at about 1,800 rpm. Operate for a minimum of FG016137

ten minutes to stabilize the system. Figure 89
2. Press the "HI" fan speed switch to set maximum air flow.
3. Put the temperature control switch in maximum cooling
position.
4. Press the "Internal Air Circulation" switch.
5. Compare the flow of bubbles in the sight glass of receiver
dryer with the drawings in the following table.
CAUTION
Overfilling refrigerant may cause dangerous
high-pressure and poor cooling action; and low
refrigerant level may cause compressor damage.
Always maintain refrigerant at normal level.
Amount of
Appearance of the Sight Glass Solutions
Refrigerant
Almost clear.
Normal Any bubbles disappear.
Charge or withdraw the system with

the correct amount of HFC-134a
High No bubbles are seen.
refrigerant.
Low A flow of bubbles is visible.
Check and Adjust Engine **

Contact your nearest DOOSAN dealer.
Engine dealer for checking and adjusting the following items:
• Engine Compression Pressure.
• Injection Pressure.
• Injection Timing.

4-50
2,000 HOUR / YEARLY SERVICE
Perform All Daily, 50, 250, 500 and 1,000

Hour Service Checks
Change Swing Reduction Device Oil 2
NOTE: Change swing reduction device oil after first 250

hours of operation or rebuild and every 2,000 hours 2
thereafter.
1
WARNING
The gear oil is very hot after the machine has been 1
FG015801
Figure 90
1. Set a container under excavator.

2. Release the drain plug (3, Figure 91) and drain the swing
reduction device oil into a container.
regulations.
3. After draining oil, tighten the drain plug.
3
3
FG016119
Figure 91
4. Remove breather/fill cap (2, Figure 90) and add oil to "H"
mark on dipstick (1).
H
FG000419
Figure 92

4-51
Replace Outer and Inner Air Cleaner
Elements
WARNING
Never clean or attempt to remove the air cleaner element if
the engine is running.
NOTE: Replace outer element after cleaning 5 times or every

2,000 hours of service.
NOTE: Replace inner element whenever a new outer
element is installed.
If there is clogged filter signal on the gauge panel, use the
following procedure.
2
1. Open the access door at the rear of the cabin.
2. Remove the evacuator valve (1, Figure 93) and air cleaner
cover (2).
1
NOTE: Inspect evacuator valve seal lips for wear or
damage. Replace valve if necessary. Install
FG016134
evacuator valve with lips parallel to the cover.
Figure 93
3. Remove outer filter (3, Figure 93) from the air cleaner
housing.
4. Clean the air cleaner cover and the inside of the air cleaner
housing.
5. Remove inner filter (4, Figure 94).
6. Clean out inside of air cleaner housing. Do not use
compressed air to blow out housing.
7. Install new inner filter. Do not clean and reuse inner
element. 4
8. Install new outer filter.

3
9. Install air cleaner cover and evacuator valve. 2
1
NOTE: Make sure that all gaskets and cover are
properly installed and seated.
FG016115
Figure 94

4-52
Change Radiator Coolant
WARNING
Allow the engine to cool before releasing the radiator cap.
Make sure to loosen the cap slowly to release any
remaining pressure.
Radiator cleaning is performed while the engine is running.
Take extreme caution when working on or near a running ARO1760L
engine. Make sure to lock out and tag the controls notifying
Figure 95
personnel that service work is being performed.
Do not remove the radiator cap unless it is required.
Observe the coolant level in the coolant recovery tank.
CAUTION
Do not mix ethylene glycol and propylene glycol when
changing the antifreeze solution. Flushing should be
performed to minimize volume of mixing between the two
columns. Mixing the two compounds may cause generation
of foreign material to damage the system.
Do not mix antifreeze solutions from different
manufactures. Mixed solution may degrade the capabilities
of the system. It is recommended to use the standard
product from Doosan.
In the bitterly cold area or weather, the customer should
frequently check the performance of the coolant for
appropriateness for the weather, and then determine
change cycle of the coolant.
1. Slowly open radiator cap to allow any pressure to escape.

1
2. Remove access covers under radiator and engine oil pan.
1
3. Place a container under drain plugs (1, Figure 96) and
drain valve (2, Figure 97). Remove drain plugs (1, Figure
96) and EGR plugs (3 and 4, Figure 98) and open drain
valve (2, Figure 97) to drain coolant.
4. Drain coolant from heater hoses by removing clamps (5
and 6, Figure 99) and hoses.
NOTE: Make sure heater hose shutoff valves are FG016120
"OPENED".
Figure 96

4-53
5. Install drain plugs (1, Figure 96), EGR plugs (3 and 4,
Figure 98) and close drain valve (2, Figure 97) after
coolant has completely drained from system. Reconnect
heater hoses with clamps (5 and 6, Figure 99).
6. Slowly fill cooling system with flushing solution to radiator
neck.
7. Run engine at low idle until coolant temperature reaches 2
"BLUE ZONE". Continue running engine for another five
minutes.
8. Shutdown engine. Remove drain plugs (1, Figure 96), EGR FG016140
plugs (3 and 4, Figure 98) and open drain valve (2, Figure Figure 97
97) to drain flushing fluid. Drain flushing fluid from heater
hoses after removing clamps (5 and 6, Figure 99).
9. Install drain plugs (1, Figure 96) and close drain valve (2,
Figure 97). Reconnect heater hoses with clamps (5 and 6,
Figure 99).
10. Do not install EGR plugs (3 and 4, Figure 98).
11. To prevent air from entering cooling system, slowly fill
system with coolant. Use proper antifreeze mixture for
ambient temperature.
NOTE: Refer to coolant concentration table. See
“Antifreeze Concentration Tables” on
page 4-83.
12. When system is filled with coolant to EGR plug holes (3
and 4, Figure 98), install plugs and continue filling to
radiator neck.
13. Run engine for five minutes at low idle so air will be purged
from system.
4
14. Loosen EGR plugs (3 and 4, Figure 98) a little and vent air.
Tighten EGR plugs.
3
15. Shutdown engine and fill radiator with coolant to radiator
neck again. Install radiator cap.
FG016138
Figure 98
16. Fill recovery tank with coolant to middle of "FULL-LOW"

after draining old coolant in recovery tank and washing it
out.
5
FG016139
Figure 99

4-54
Hydraulic Oil Exchange and Suction
Strainer Cleaning
WARNING
The hydraulic tank is pressurized. Lift the breather cap to ARO1760L
allow the pressurized air to vent. After the pressure has Figure 100
been released, it is safe to remove either the fill cap or
service covers.
IMPORTANT
Make sure to clean any dirt or water from the top of the
hydraulic tank, especially around the fill port and filter ports.
Hydraulic oil change interval is 2,000 hours, only when
DOOSAN Genuine Oil is used. If another brand of oil is
used, guaranteed change interval is 1,000 hours.
NOTE: Based on the type of excavating being completed,

the working conditions (extremely hot or dusty) and
the extra front end attachments being used (hydraulic
breaker, etc.), the hydraulic fluid will need to be
changed more frequently.
1. Position the machine on firm, level ground. Swing upper
structure perpendicular (90°) to tracks. Lower boom and
position bucket on ground as shown in Figure 101.
4. Release pressurized air from hydraulic tank by lifting
breather cap (1, Figure 104).
FG015805
Figure 101

4-55
5. Drain hydraulic oil from tank into a container capable of
holding 280 liters (74 U.S. gal.). After draining tank, install
drain plug.
IMPORTANT
Be careful of squirting oil when removing drain plug.
NOTE: Used filter and used oil should always be

FG015797
disposed of according to local regulations.
Figure 102
6. Carefully remove bolts and cover (2, Figure 104) from top
of hydraulic oil tank. There is a spring (3) under the cover
that will force the cover up.
7. Remove spring (3, Figure 104) and strainer (5), by pulling
on rod (4).
A
8. Clean inside and outside of strainer. Replace strainer if it is
broken.
9. Position strainer (5, Figure 104) on boss portion of suction
pipe (6).
NOTE: Measurement "A" is 787 mm (30.98 in).
HAOC411L
Figure 103
10. Fill the hydraulic oil tank. Check level using sight gauge on
side of tank. 1
2
11. Place spring (3, Figure 104) on rod (4) and assemble cover
(2).
12. After replacing and cleaning the hydraulic oil, filter and
strainer, vent the system. See “Venting and Priming
Hydraulic System” on page 4-89. 3
IMPORTANT 4
When the hydraulic breaker is being used, due to the

higher heat generated by this unit, use replacement
intervals recommended under the “Hydraulic Oil and 5
Filter Service Intervals” on page 3-36.
13. Check level of hydraulic oil tank. (See page 4-15) 6
ARO1720L
Figure 104

4-56
Check Alternator and Starter**
**These checks need to be completed by an authorized
DOOSAN dealer.
Check All Rubber Antivibration Shock

Mounts
Perform and Record the Results of the

Cycle Time Tests
Inspect Machine to Check for Cracked or

Broken Welds or other Structural
Damage
Check, Adjust Valve Clearance **
Check Head Bolt Torques

4-57
4,000 HOUR / BIENNIAL
SERVICE
Major Parts - Periodic Replacement

To ensure safe operation and work, perform periodic
inspections. Also, to increase safety, replace the following parts.
These parts are the ones most often subjected to abrasion, heat
and fatigue. Exchange these parts with new ones at the
designated time intervals, even if the old parts look good.
Always replace all related parts such as gaskets and O-rings.
Use only original equipment manufacturers parts.
Major Component Parts Name to be Exchanged Periodically Time to Exchange

Engine Fuel hose (Tank to fuel prefilter)
Fuel hose (Fuel prefilter to fuel cooler)
Fuel hose (Fuel cooler to ECU)
Fuel hose (ECU to engine CP pump)
Fuel hose (Tank to CP pump)
Heater hose (Heater to engine)
Heater hose (Heater to radiator)
Air Conditioner hose
2 years or 4,000 hours
Hydraulic Body Pump suction hose
System Pump discharge hoses
Pump side branch hoses
Swing motor hoses
Travel motor hoses
Work Boom cylinder line hoses
Device Arm cylinder line hoses
Bucket cylinder line hoses

4-58
12,000 HOUR / 6 YEAR SERVICE
Hose In-service Lifetime Limit (European

Standard ISO 8331 and EN982 CEN)
European regulations state that the in-service life of any
hydraulic hose may not exceed six years. DOOSAN
recommends the following;
• Hoses at the customer premises cannot be stored
more than 2 years before being discarded or installed
on a machine.
• In-service lifetime of hoses fitted on a machine can
never exceed 6 years, but replace hoses described in
“Major Parts - Periodic Replacement” on page 4-58,
every 2 years. Always replace hoses having
exceeded the allowed in-service lifetime irrespective
of the external appearance/wear.
• Always store hoses in a dark place at a maximum of
65% relative humidity, between 0°C (32°F) and 35°C
(95°F) but as close as possible to 15°C (59°F) and
away from copper, manganese or tube generating
Ozone.

4-59
AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM
NOTE: See “Clean Air-Conditioning Outer Filter” on
page 4-36.
Check Control Panel

When a function switch is pushed, the last setting has to be
displayed on the LCD display.
When the light switch is turned to "I" position, the LED for
illumination in the control panel has to turn "ON".
Check Air Conditioner Hoses

Check the hose for cracking and damage.
CAUTION
When a leak occurs, dirt will accumulate in the area where
the leak is. Consult a DOOSAN distributor or sales agency.
Check Condenser
Inspect the condenser for dust and debris. Clean if necessary.
NOTE: See “Clean Radiator, Oil Cooler, Intercooler, Fuel
Cooler and Air Conditioner Condenser Core” on
page 4-38.
Check Magnetic Clutch

Check the magnetic clutch for dirt and interference.
Push the "A/C" switch in order to energize magnetic clutch and
check the magnetic clutch.
Check Belt Tension

NOTE: See “Check Engine Fan Belt Tension” on page 4-30.

4-60
BOLT AND NUT INSPECTION
Inspect ALL fasteners after the first 50 hours of operation and
every 250 hours thereafter. If any are loose or are missing
tighten them or install new hardware. Always use a calibrated
torque wrench.
IMPORTANT
Always clean fasteners before tightening.
If counterweight is loose, contact a DOOSAN distributor or
sales agent.
.
BOLT BOLT TORQUE
NO. POINT TO BE INSPECTED DIA. QTY. HEAD
mm SIZE kg•m Nm ft lb
Joint bolt with engine pump side 12 1 19 10.5 103 76

1 mounting bracket and
engine fan side 22 8 32 75 735 542
Joint bolt and nut pump side 24 2 36 91 892 658

2 between engine mount-
ing bracket and frame fan side 24 2 36 91 892 658
3 Radiator mounting bolt 16 4 24 27 265 195

4 Tightening bolt for hydraulic oil tank 20 6 30 55 539 398
5 Tightening bolt for fuel tank 20 6 30 55 539 398
6 Tightening bolt for pump 12 4/8 19 11/9 108/88 80/65
7 Tightening bolt for control valve 20 4 30 55 539 398
8 Tightening bolt for swing reduction device 24 24 36 95 932 687
9 Tightening bolt for swing motor 16 4 14 27 265 195
10 Tightening bolt for battery 10 2 17 5 49 36
Joint bolt with cabin mounting rubber and
10 20 17 6.5 64 47
frame
11
Joint bolt with cabin mounting rubber and
16 5 24 21 206 152
cabin
Joint bolt with swing bearing and upper
30 45 46 176 1726 1273
frame
12
Joint bolt with swing bearing and bottom
30 48 46 182 1785 1316
frame
Tightening bolt for travel device 24 44 36 90 883 651
13
Tightening bolt for sprocket 24 44 36 90 883 651
Tightening bolt for upper pump side 20 24 30 53 520 383
14
roller flange side 20 24 30 53 520 383
15 Tightening bolt for bottom roller 24 64 36 90 883 651
16 Tightening bolt for track guard 24 64 36 90 883 651
17 Bolt for track shoes 24 64 36 191 1874 1381

4-61
BOLT BOLT TORQUE
NO. POINT TO BE INSPECTED DIA. QTY. HEAD
mm SIZE kg•m Nm ft lb
16 9 24 27 265 195
18 Fixing bolt for front pin
20 3 30 40 392 289
19 Fixing bolt for track frame and side frame 36 40 55 288 2824 2083
20 Fixing bolt for fan motor 16/12 2/1 24/19 24/11 265/108 195/80
21 Fixing bolt for fan pump 14 2 12 17 167 123
22 Breaker Filter (Optional) PF1/2 2 10 27 265 195

4-62
1. Joint bolt with engine mounting bracket and engine
1) Pump side
• Tool: 19 mm ( )
• Torque: 10.5 kg•m (103 Nm, 123 ft lb)
FG016173
Figure 105
2) Fan side
• Tool: 22 mm ( )
• Torque: 17 kg•m (167 Nm, 123 ft lb)
FG016083
Figure 106
2. Joint bolt and nut between engine mounting bracket and

frame
1) Pump side
• Tool: 36 mm ( )
FG016084
Figure 107
2) Fan side
• Tool: 36 mm ( )
FG016085
Figure 108

4-63
3. Radiator mounting bolt
• Tool: 24 mm ( )
FG016086
Figure 109
4. Tightening bolt for hydraulic oil tank
• Tool: 30 mm ( )
FG016087
Figure 110
5. Tightening bolt for fuel tank
• Tool: 30 mm ( )
FG016088
Figure 111
6. Tightening bolt for pump

1) Main pump
• Tool: 19 mm ( )

1
2) Pump cover
2
• Tool: 19 mm ( ) FG016089
• Torque: 9 kg•m (88 Nm, 65 ft lb) Figure 112

4-64
7. Tightening bolt for control valve
• Tool: 30 mm ( )
FG016090
Figure 113
8. Tightening bolt for swing reduction device
• Tool: 36 mm ( )
FG016091
Figure 114
9. Tightening bolt for swing motor
• Tool: 14 mm ( )
FG016092
Figure 115
10. Tightening bolt for battery
• Tool: 17 mm ( )
FG001592
Figure 116

4-65
11. Joint bolt with cabin mounting rubber and frame
• Tool: 17 mm ( )
• Torque: 6.5 kg•m (64 Nm, 47 ft lb)
FG000454
Figure 117
Joint bolt with cabin mounting rubber and cabin
• Tool: 24 mm ( )
FG000455
Figure 118
12. Joint bolt with swing bearing and upper frame
• Tool: 46 mm ( )
• Torque: 176 kg•m (1,726 Nm, 1,273 ft lb)
FG016093
Figure 119
Joint bolt with swing bearing and bottom frame
• Tool: 46 mm ( )
FG001594
Figure 120

4-66
13. Tightening bolt for travel device
• Tool: 36 mm ( )
FG016094
Figure 121
Tightening bolt for sprocket
• Tool: 36 mm ( )
FG016095
Figure 122
14. Tightening bolt for upper roller

1) Fan side
• Tool: 30 mm ( )
FG016096
Figure 123
2) Flange side
• Tool: 30 mm ( )
FG016097
Figure 124

4-67
15. Tightening bolt for bottom roller
• Tool: 36 mm ( )
FG016098
Figure 125
16. Tightening bolt for track guard
• Tool: 36 mm ( )
FG016099
Figure 126
17. Bolt for track shoes

Tighten the bolts in the order as shown in the Figure 127 (1
→ 4)
• Tool: 36 mm ( )
4
2
1
3
FG016171
Figure 127
18. Fixing bolt for front pin

1) Arm end side 1
1
• Tool: 24 mm ( ) (1)
• Tool: 30 mm ( ) (2)
2
FG016147
Figure 128

4-68
2) Arn cylinder, boom cylinder side
• Tool: 24 mm ( ) (1) 2
• Tool: 30 mm ( ) (2)
1
FG016148
Figure 129
2 1
FG016151
Figure 130
3) Bucket side
2
• Tool: 24 mm ( ) (1) 1
• Tool: 30 mm ( ) (2)

FG016149
Figure 131
FG016150
Figure 132

4-69
19. Fixing bolt for track frame and side frame
• Tool: 55 mm ( )
FG016107
Figure 133
20. Fixing bolt for fan motor
• Tool: 24 mm ( ) (1)
• Tool: 19 mm ( ) (2)
1 2
2
2
Radiator
2
Oil Cooler
FG016172
Figure 134

4-70
21. Fixing bolt for fan pump
• Tool: 12 mm ( )
FG016153
Figure 135
22. Fixing breaker filter (Optional)
• Tool: 10 mm ( )
FG016175
Figure 136

4-71
BUCKET
Bucket Tooth Replacement
WARNING
Due to the possibility of flying metal objects, always wear
safety helmet, protective gloves and eye protection when
changing bucket teeth.
Curl the bucket upwards and place the round rear surface
of the bucket firmly on the ground. Shut the engine off and
lock out the hydraulic controls before working on the
bucket.
NOTE: These instructions are only for DOOSAN OEM

buckets. If you are using other manufacturers
buckets, refer to their specific instructions.
HAOC680L
Figure 137
1. On a routine basis, inspect bucket teeth to make sure that

tooth wear or breakage has not developed. Do not allow
replaceable bucket teeth to wear down to a point that
bucket adapter is exposed. See Figure 137.
2. To replace a tooth (1, Figure 138), use a hammer and
punch to drive locking pin (2) and lock washer (3) out of
tooth adapter (4). 4
3. Once worn tooth has been removed, use a putty knife to 3

scrape adapter as clean as possible.
4. Slide new tooth into position and insert lock washer. 2 1 FG000346
Figure 138
5. Insert locking pin into tooth and with a hammer, drive pin in
until lock washer seats in locking groove.

4-72
Bucket O-ring Replacement
WARNING
Due to possibility of flying metal objects, always wear
safety helmet, protective gloves and eye protection when
changing pins.
1. Inspect bucket O-rings on a routine basis. If worn or FG000502

damaged, replacement is necessary. Figure 139
2. Roll old O-ring (1, Figure 140) onto boss (2) around bucket
pin (3). Remove bucket pin and move arm or bucket link 1 4
(4) out of way. 2
ARO1390L
Figure 140
3. Remove old O-ring and temporarily install new O-ring (1,

Figure 141) onto bucket boss (2). Make sure that O-ring 1 4
groove on both bucket link (4) and boss have been 2
cleaned.
4. Realign arm or link with bucket pin hole and insert bucket
pin (3, Figure 140).
ARO1391L
Figure 141
5. Roll new O-ring (1, Figure 142) into O-ring groove.
ARO1392L
Figure 142

4-73
BUCKET SHIMMING
PROCEDURES
New Bucket Installation

1. If a new bucket is being installed on the excavator,
measure the inside dimension between the bucket ears
and the outside dimension across the arm mounting boss.
2. Subtract the clearance on both sides from the difference of
the two and shim accordingly, before assembly.
WARNING
To check end play (side-to-side) clearance at bucket
attachment point, the bucket must be free to move but at all
other times lower it to the ground or use support blocks to
immobilize this assembly. Shut off engine and tag and lock
out controls to prevent movement during this procedure.
Shimming Procedures for Installed Bucket

"Y"
1. With bucket attached, curl bucket and arm outward and
2
lower boom so that bucket teeth are pointing away from
excavator, just a few inches off ground. This position
provides easy accessibility for dimensional measurements.
3
2. Force bucket to one side and check for end play (side to 1
side) clearance under O-rings at attachment point. Total
clearance should be 1 mm (0.04 in) between side face of 4
boss and inside edge of ear bushing (Y, Figure 143). Too
tight a fit (less than 1 mm (0.04 in)) can cause excessive
wear while too much clearance may produce excessive
noise and potentially hazardous slack control.
3. Recheck end play by forcing bucket towards opposite side
and repeating clearance measurements.
FG016145
4. If an adjustment is required, remove two jam nuts (1,
Figure 143
Figure 143) and bolt (2) from pin (3). Add or remove shims
(4) as required. Use an equal amount of shims on each
side. Install bolt (2) and two jam nuts (1). Jam nuts must
clear boss by 1 - 2 mm (0.04 - 0.08 in) at point (X).

4-74
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
NOTE: Never disassemble electrical or electronic parts.
Consult with a DOOSAN distributor or sales agency
before servicing.
Battery
WARNING
Battery electrolyte contains sulfuric acid and can quickly
burn the skin and eat holes in clothing. If you spill acid on
yourself, immediately flush the area with water.
Battery acid could cause blindness if splashed into the
eyes. If acid gets into the eyes, flush them immediately with
large quantities of water and see a doctor at once.
If you accidentally drink acid, drink a large quantity of water
or milk, beaten egg or vegetable oil. Call a doctor or poison
prevention center immediately.
When working with batteries, always wear safety glasses or
goggles.
Battery generates hydrogen gas, so there is danger of an
explosion. Do not bring lighted cigarettes near the battery,
or do anything that will cause sparks.
Before working with batteries, shut down engine and turn
the starter switch to the "O" (OFF) position.
Avoid short circuiting the battery terminals through
accidental contact with metallic objects, such as tool.
When removing or installing, check which is the positive (+)
terminal and negative (-) terminal.
When removing the battery, first disconnect the negative (-)
terminal. When installing the battery, first connect the
positive (+) terminal.
If the terminals are loose, there is danger that the defective
contact may generate sparks that will cause an explosion.
When installing the terminals, install them tightly.
Batteries in Cold Weather

In colder weather a greater drain is placed on the batteries when
they are used for the preheat cycle and when starting a cold
engine. Battery performance decreases as the temperature gets
lower.
In extremely cold weather, remove the batteries at night and
move them to a warm location. This will help to keep them at a
higher power level.

4-75
Inspection of Battery Electrolyte Level
This machine has two maintenance free batteries. They never
require the addition to water.
When the charge indicator becomes transparency, it means low
electrolyte state because of the leakage or charging system
error. Determine the cause of problem and replace the batteries
immediately.
FG000347
Figure 144
Check Charging State

Check charging state through the charging indicator.
• GREEN: Sufficiently charged.
• BLACK: Insufficient charged.
• TRANSPARENT: Replace battery.
Check the Battery Terminals

Be certain that the battery is held securely in its compartment.
Clean the battery terminals and the battery cable connectors. A
solution of baking soda and water will neutralize acid on the battery
surface, terminals, and cable connectors. Petroleum jelly or grease
can be applied to the connectors to help prevent corrosion.
Battery Replacement
When the charging indicator indicates transparency state, replace
the battery. The batteries should always be replaced in pairs. HAOU790L
Using an old battery with a new one will shorten the life span of Figure 145
the new battery.

4-76
Fuses
1. The fuses in the fuse box are used to protect the various
electrical circuits and their components from being
damaged. See Figure 146. The fuses used are standard
automotive type fuses.
O X
2. The section on “Fuse Identification” on page 4-78, lists the
circuits and the fuse amperage required for each circuit. If
a fuse blows, determine the cause and repair any faults or
failures.
3. Do not insert a higher amperage fuse into a lower
amperage slot. Serious damage to the electrical
components or fire can result. HAOC670L
Figure 146
CAUTION
Before replacing a fuse, be sure to turn starter switch to "O"
(OFF) position.
Fuse Boxes
There are two fuse boxes (Figure 147) on the left side of the
heater box. The fuses prevent electrical devices from
overloading or shorting.
A decal attached to the inside of the fuse box's cover indicates
the function and amperage of each fuse.
Spare fuses are mounted on the inside of fuse box's cover. (One
each of a 10A, 15A, 20A and 30A.)
Change a fuse if the element separates. If the element of a new
FG000110
fuse separates, check the circuit and repair the circuit.
Figure 147
CAUTION
Always replace fuses with the same type and capacity fuse
that was removed. Otherwise, electrical damage could result.

4-77
Fuse Identification
Fuse Box (1) Fuse Box (2)
FG000542
Figure 148
Fuse Box One Fuse Box Two

No. No.
Name Capacity Name Capacity
1 Warning Light (Optional) 10A 1 Horn 10A
2 2-pump (Optional) 10A 2 Quick Clamp (Optional) 10A
3 Cigar Lighter 10A 3 Travel Alarm (Optional) 10A
4 12V Power 10A 4 Auxiliary Mode 10A
5 Wiper, Washer 10A 5 Check Connector 10A
6 Lower Wiper (Optional) 10A 6 Pilot Cutoff 10A
7 Stereo 10A 7 Memory Backup 10A
8 Starter Switch, Hour Meter 10A 8 Room Light 10A
9 Spare 30A 9 Cabin Light (Optional) 30A
10 Air Conditioner, Heater 20A 10 Work Light 20A
11 Shear, Breaker (Optional) 15A 11 Fuel Heater 20A
12 Seat Heater (Optional) 15A 12 Instrument Panel, Pressure Sensor 15A
e-EPOS, Booster, Travel speed
13 15A 13 Headlight 15A
changer, Booster
14 ECU 15A 14 Fuel Pump (Optional), Wiper 15A

4-78
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
General
Keeping an engine's cooling system in peak operating condition,
can have many benefits to keeping a machine in good operating
condition. A properly functioning cooling system will; improve
fuel efficiency, reduce engine wear, and extend component life.
Always use distilled water in the radiator. Contaminants in tap
water neutralize the corrosion inhibitor components. If tap water
must be used, it should not exceed 300 ppm hardness, or
contain more than 100 ppm of either chloride or sulfate. Water
that has been treated with a water softener also contains salt
that will cause corrosion of components. Water from creeks and
stagnant pools usually contains dirt, minerals and/or organic
material that are deposited in the cooling system and impair
cooling efficiency. Distilled water is the best.
Make at least a minimum mixture of 40% antifreeze with 60%
distilled water for adding additional fluid to the system during
normal maintenance. This level will help maintain the additive
concentration of the system. Check the coolant every 500 hours.
Engine overheating is often caused by bent or clogged radiator
fins. The spaces between the fins can be cleaned by use of air
or water under pressure. When straightening bent fins, use care
not to damage the tubes or break the bond between the fins and
the tubes.
CAUTION
Maintaining the proper anticorrosive additive levels in
antifreeze will help protect the engine and other
components from becoming corroded.
If anticorrosive additive levels are not properly maintained
and monitored, server damage to the cooling pump and
cylinder liners may result. This corrosion can also result in
the radiator tubes becoming clogged and loosing their heat
transfer efficiency. The engine (Model: DV11) uses a
wet-type cylinder liner design, which requires, a high
efficiency cooling system flow, to maintain proper engine
temperatures.
The coolant and its additives can be checked by using
coolant test paper (No: 60.99901-0038).
WARNING
Pressure at air nozzle must not exceed 2.1 kg/cm2 (30
psi). Always wear goggles when using compressed air.
Do not pour cold water into radiator when engine is very
hot and water level is below the top of the tubes. Such
action could result in damage to engine cylinder heads.

4-79
Heavy duty diesel engines require a balanced mixture of water
and antifreeze. Drain and replace the mixture every year or
2,000 hours of operation, which ever comes first. This will
eliminate buildup of harmful chemicals.
Antifreeze is essential in any climate. It broadens the operating
temperature range by lowering the coolant's freezing point and
by raising its boiling point. Do not use more than 50% antifreeze
in the mixture unless additional freeze protection is required.
Never use more than 68% antifreeze under any condition.
Measuring the Concentration of Coolant

The coolant and its additives can be checked by using coolant
test strips (No: 60.99901-0038). Use the following procedure to
conduct the test:
1. With a coolant temperature of 10° - 55°C (50° - 131°F),
drain 1 liter (1 U.S. quart) it from the radiator into a clean
plastic container.
NOTE: Do not take the sample from the coolant
recovery tank. Recovery tank coolant
concentration can differ from the concentration
level of coolant in the radiator.
2. Dip test strip, into coolant sample for 3 - 5 seconds.
Remove strip and excessive coolant by giving the strip one
shack.
3. Wait for 45 seconds, for the test strip to change color.
NOTE: Measuring time should not be more than 75
seconds. If it is over this time limit, the color will
be changed and an inaccurate reading will
result.
4. Compare the color of the test strip with the color table on
the outside of test strip container bottle, and determine
what numeric value corresponds to the color in the table.
A. Check antifreeze concentration levels by comparing
the color change at the end of test paper, with the
green spectrum range, with the green symbol on the
upper portion of the container bottle.
NOTE: A suitable concentration indicator should
be between 33% and 50%).
B. Check the anticorrosive additives, by comparing
brown color in the middle range of the test strip and
pink color on the lower part of the test strip, with the
brown and pink spectrum range. Where the brown
(vertical) color and pink (horizontal) color intersects
represents the anticorrosive additive level.
NOTE: A reading between 0.3 and 0.8, represents
an adequate additive level.
5. Correct the antifreeze concentration and additive levels.

4-80
A. If anticorrosive additive level is below 0.3, add 100%
pure antifreeze to the radiator.
B. If anticorrosive additive level is greater 0.8, add a
50% distilled water and antifreeze mixture to lower
the additive reading.
NOTE: In either case keep the antifreeze concentration
level between 33% and 50%.
6. Run the engine to recirculate the coolant mixture. Be sure
that engine reaches operating temperature to ensure a
thorough mix. Shut down engine and retest antifreeze.
NOTE: When making adjustment, drain 1 liter (1 U.S.
quart) of coolant from the radiator. Add 30 cc (1
fl oz) at a time to the drained fluid. Keep track of
how many cc's (fl oz's) were added to the 1 liter
(1 U.S. quart) to obtain a proper reading. Then
multiply that number times the total system
capacity of liters (U.S. quarts). Add that amount
to the radiator.
Example: If 1 liter needs 90 cc to obtain proper
reading. Then system capacity of 40
liters x 90 cc = 3,600 cc (3.6 liters) of
correction fluid.

4-81
Types of Antifreeze
There are two main classifications of antifreeze available on the
market today.
1. Ethylene Glycol - Doosan Genuine Antifreeze Solution
(for all seasons)
2. Propylene Glycol - Doosan Genuine Antifreeze Solution
(for all seasons)
Ethylene glycol has been on the market for many years. Its
chemical properties do not provide the improved corrosion
resistance that propylene glycol does. Ethylene glycol is also
very hazardous to the environment, people and animals.
DOOSAN recommends that ethylene glycol be replaced with
propylene glycol.
The newer propylene glycol antifreeze comes in many different
colors. Some of the colors are pink, red, orange and yellow.
There are even some that come in a blue-green color. The
blue-green color makes it very difficult to tell the difference of
what type of antifreeze is in a cooling system. The colors are
only a dye added to the clear antifreeze. Do not rely on color.
Keep careful machine records of what brand and type of
antifreeze is used in the unit. If you are unsure of what type of
antifreeze is in the system, drain and flush the system.
CAUTION
Do not mix the ethylene glycol and propylene glycol
solutions. If these two chemicals are mixed, undesirable
chemicals may be formed, which damages the equipment.
Do not mix up the solutions from different manufacturers.
Otherwise, the performance may be deteriorated. It is
recommended to use the Doosan Genuine Product.
In the regions under extreme weather, the user should
determine the performance of the coolant suitable for the
weather condition and decide the replacement cycle.

4-82
Antifreeze Concentration Tables
Ethylene Glycol - Doosan Genuine Antifreeze Solution (for all seasons)
(2,000 Hour / Yearly)
Ambient Temperature Cooling Water Antifreeze
-10°C (14°F) 80% 20%
-15°C (5°F) 73% 27%
-20°C (-4°F) 67% 33%
-25°C (-13°F) 60% 40%
-30°C (-22°F) 56% 44%
-40°C (-40°F) 50% 50%
Propylene Glycol - Doosan Genuine Antifreeze Solution (for all seasons)

(2,000 Hour / Yearly)
Ambient Temperature Cooling Water Antifreeze
-10°C (14°F) 78% 22%
-15°C (5°F) 71% 29%
-20°C (-4°F) 65% 35%
-25°C (-13°F) 59% 41%
-30°C (-22°F) 55% 45%
-40°C (-40°F) 48% 52%
NOTE: Mixing ratio is for reference purpose only, and is not

an absolute standard.
NOTE: Replacement cycle of the Doosan Genuine Product is
2,000 hours or one year.

4-83
FUEL TRANSFER PUMP
(OPTIONAL)
WARNING
Do not dry operate fuel pump for more than fifteen seconds.
• Cooling and lubrication of pump is achieved by
fuel passing through pump. If pump is dry
operated, heat generated by moving parts will
cause damage to pump rotors, vanes and seals.
To prevent unnecessary wear and/or damage to
pump do not dry operate fuel pump for more than
fifteen seconds.
Do not operate pump for more than fifteen minutes at a time.
• Continuous usage of pump over recommended
time interval will cause overheating of motor and
will result in causing motor damage.
Do not use refueling pump for other types of fuel or fluids.
(Use only for diesel fuel.)
• Do not use refueling pump for other types of fuel
which have a low flash point.
• Do not use refueling pump for fuel contaminated
with water or high humidity. Moisture in pump
mechanism can cause rust and can create pump
failure.
Always operate pump using strainer installed on inlet hose.
This will prevent any foreign materials from being
introduced into pump. Always maintain pump and all of its
components in a clean condition.
• If dirt or other foreign materials enter pump, it can
become lodged between the rotor and/or vanes and
generate heat which can cause pump damage.
• Do not remove strainer or use a strainer with
larger mesh to increase flow of fuel.
Be careful not to overfill or spill fuel.
Make sure direction of check valve is in line with flow
direction of fuel.
If any pump parts or components become lost, damaged or
inoperable, immediately replace it with a new ones.
IMPORTANT
If there are any sign of leakage while operating transfer
pump, inspect the following components to prevent any
fires or hazardous fuel spills.
• Check all hoses leading to and from the transfer
pump.
• Check all hose clamps.
• Check transfer pump inlet port.

4-84
The transfer pump is used to transfer fuel from a refueling
source to the fuel tank. A check valve is installed in the inlet
hose to prevent fuel from flowing back from fuel tank to source.
A strainer is installed in inlet hose to prevent any foreign material
from being introduced into transfer pump or fuel tank.
A thermal limiter, built into the motor, will automatically shut off
power if motor is overheating to protect it from being damaged.
Fuel
2 3
Fuel Tank
IN OUT
FG016185
Figure 149
Reference Reference
Number Number
1 Body 3 Inlet Hose
2 Check Valve
1. Insert inlet hose (3, Figure 149) into refueling tank.

2. Turn fuel pump "ON" press (Figure 150) inside of battery
box on front side.
NOTE: Transfer pump rate of flow is approximately 100
liters/minute (26.4 U.S. gpm). Use extra care
not to overfill fuel tank so that fuel does not over
flow.
3. Once fuel transfer is completed automatically "OFF"
position to stop pump.
4. Lift inlet hose (3, Figure 149) from fueling source and turn FG015806
switch to "I" (ON) position for two - three seconds to drain Figure 150
remaining fuel from hose to fuel tank.
5. Inlet strainer and return hose (3) to storage position.

4-85
HANDLING OF ACCUMULATOR
WARNING
Even though the engine is stopped, the hydraulic
accumulators for the pilot system are still charged. Do not
disconnect any pilot system hoses until accumulator
pressure has been released from the circuit. To release
pressure, turn the starter switch to the "I" (ON) position and
operate all hydraulic control levers and forward/reverse
travel levers. Even though the engine is shutdown hydraulic
actuated components may move while releasing pilot
pressure. Keep all personnel away from excavator while
performing this operation.
• Set safety lever on "LOCK" position after
stopping engine.
• DO NOT mishandle accumulator(s). They are very
dangerous because they contain high-pressure
nitrogen gas.
• DO NOT punch a hole or apply heat or fire to an
accumulator.
• DO NOT weld on accumulator, or try attaching
anything to it.
• When replacing an accumulator, contact a
DOOSAN distributor or sales agency so the gas
can be properly released.
• Wear safety goggles and protective gloves when
working on an accumulator. Hydraulic oil under
pressure can penetrate the skin and cause
serious injuries.
Release pilot accumulator pressure using the following

procedure;
2. Set safety lever on "RELEASED" position.
3. Turn starter switch to the "I" (ON) position.
4. Fully stroke work and travel levers in all directions.
FG016144
6. Turn key to "O" (OFF) position and remove from starter
Figure 151
switch.
7. Remove accumulator by unscrewing it slowly.

4-86
TRACK TENSION
WARNING
Safely measuring track tension requires two people. One
person must be in the operator's seat, running the controls
to keep one side frame in the air, while the other person
makes dimensional checks. Take all necessary precautions
to make sure the machine won't move or shift position
during service. Warm up the engine to prevent stalls, travel
the excavator to an area that provides level, uniform ground
support and/or use support blocks when necessary.
The track adjusting mechanism is under very
high-pressure. NEVER release pressure too suddenly. The
grease cylinder valve should never be backed off more than
one complete turn from the fully snugged down position.
Bleed off pressure slowly and keep your body away from
the valve at all times.
Track shoe link pins and bushings wear with normal usage,
reducing track tension. Periodic adjustment is necessary to
compensate for wear and it may also be required by working
conditions.
1. Track tension is checked by jacking up one side of the
excavator. See Figure 152. Place blocking under frame
while taking measurement.
90 ~ 110
FG015779
Figure 152
2. Measuring the distance (A, Figure 153) between the

bottom of the side frame and the top of the lowest crawler
shoe. Recommended tension for operation over most
types of terrain is 380 - 430 mm (14.96 - 16.93 in)
NOTE: This measurement can be thrown off if there is
too much mud or dirt or other material in the
track assembly. Clean off the tracks before A
checking clearance.
3. Too little sag in the crawler track (less than 380 mm
(14.96 in) clearance) can cause excessive component
FG000162
wear. The recommended adjustment can also be too tight
Figure 153
causing accelerated stress and wear if ground conditions
are wet, marshy or muddy, or if the ground is hard and full
of rocks or gravel.

4-87
4. The increased clearance recommended for muddy ground
conditions is between 430 - 460 mm (16.93 - 18.11 in). The
clearance should be approximately 460 mm (18.11 in) for
operation over gravel, rocky terrain, or over sand or snow.
WARNING
The track adjusting mechanism is under very
high-pressure. NEVER release pressure too suddenly.
The grease cylinder valve should never be backed off
more than 1 complete turn from the fully snugged
down position. Bleed off pressure slowly and keep
your body away from the valve at all times. If there is
problem in the fitting thread, the valve or fitting might
be ejected at high speed to cause fatal wound.
5. Track tension adjustments are made through the grease

fitting (1, Figure 154) in the middle of each side frame.
Adding grease increases the length of an adjustment
2
cylinder (2). The longer the adjustment cylinder, the
greater the pressure on the tension spring pushing the
track idler wheel outward.
6. If there is not enough slack or clearance in the tracks and
the adjustment is too tight, the idler wheel and adjusting
1
cylinder can be retracted by bleeding off grease through 3
hole in valve (3, Figure 154) by loosening valve slowly.
FG016146
NOTE: After track tension is adjusted by loosening
valve, be sure to tighten valve (3, Figure 154) Figure 154
with 27 kg•m (265 Nm, 195 ft lb).
WARNING
Do not loosen or remove the grease fitting (1, Figure
154) until the pressure is entirely bleed off by slowly
loosening valve (3, Figure 154).

4-88
VENTING AND PRIMING
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Main System Pump 2

NOTE: If pump is run without sufficient oil in the main
hydraulic pump, damage can occur. Always vent 1
1 2
pump of air after draining hydraulic system.
2. Remove flushing hose (1) from the adapter (2).
3. Remove adapter (2) and O-ring from the pump housing.
4. Fill pump housing with hydraulic oil.
5. Install new O-ring onto adapter (2) and assemble the
FG016141
adapter on pump housing.
Figure 155
6. Connect flushing hose (1) to adapter (2).
7. Start engine, and run at "LOW IDLE". Raise boom to its
maximum height.
8. Very slowly loosen negative control hose connector (3)
until hydraulic oil start to leak from the connection.
9. When hydraulic oil begins to leak, tighten hose connector.
10. Shut down engine, turn starter switch "ON", and slowly
lower the boom until the bucket pin touches the ground.
(This will increase the air pressure in the hydraulic tank)
11. Slowly loosen air bleeding plug (4) until hydraulic oil leaks
out.
12. When hydraulic oil begins to leak, then tighten plug (4).
Hydraulic Cylinders
IMPORTANT
If cylinders are operated in high idle after the hydraulic
system has been drained or the cylinder has been rebuilt,
damage to piston packing and seals may occur. Always
vent air from cylinders at low idle and at a slow speed.
1. Run engine at low idle. Extend and retract each cylinder to

within 100 mm (4 in) of fully stroking it 4 - 5 times.
2. Operate fully extend and retract each cylinder 3- 4 times.
3. Repeat procedure until cylinders extend and retract
smoothly.

4-89
Swing Motor
IMPORTANT
If the air is not vented from the system, it will cause damage
to the swing motor and bearings.
NOTE: Perform this only when oil has been drained from
swing motor. FG016142
1. Shut down engine. Figure 156
2. Disconnect drain hose and fill swing motor case with

hydraulic oil.
3. Connect the drain hose.
4. Start engine and set throttle at "LOW IDLE" and swing
upper structure slowly two full revolutions to the left and
right.
Travel Motor
NOTE: Perform this only when oil is drained from travel
motor
1. Shut down engine
2. Disconnect drain hose (Figure 157) and fill motor case with
hydraulic oil.
3. Connect drain hose.
4. Start engine and set engine speed control dial to "LOW
FG016143
IDLE". Run the engine for one minute and slowly drive
Figure 157
excavator forwards and backwards.
General Venting
1. After venting air from all components, shut the engine
down and check the hydraulic oil level. Fill hydraulic oil
tank to "H" mark on sight gauge.
2. Start engine and operate all controls again, run engine for
five minutes to ensure all systems have been vent and
purged of air. Set engine speed to "LOW IDLE", and check
hydraulic oil level again. Add oil as necessary.
3. Check for oil leaks and clean all fill and venting locations.

4-90
LONG TERM STORAGE
When a machine is taken out of service and stored for a time
exceeding 30 days, steps must be taken to protect the machine.
Leaving equipment outdoors exposed to the elements will
shorten its life.
An enclosure will protect the machine from rapid temperature
changes and lessen the amount of condensation that forms in
hydraulic components, engine, fuel tank, etc. If it is not possible
to put the machine in an enclosure, cover it with a tarpaulin.
FG016154
Check that the storage site is not subject to flooding or other Figure 158
natural disasters.
After the machine has been positioned for storage and the
engine shut down, perform the following operations:
Before Storage
Keep the excavator in the position shown in Figure 92 to prevent
rust of the hydraulic piston rods.
• Inspect for damaged, loose or missing parts.
• Repaint necessary area to prevent oxidation.
• Wash and clean all parts of machine.
• Store the machine indoor, stable place. If stored
outside, cover with a waterproof tarpaulin.
• Perform lubrication procedures on all grease points.
• Apply a coating of light oil to the exposed plated
metal surfaces (such as hydraulic cylinder rods, etc.)
and to all the control linkage and control cylinders.
(Control valve spools, etc.)
• Remove the battery from the excavator to be fully
charged and stored.
• Inspect the coolant recovery tank and radiator to
make sure the antifreeze level in the system is
correct. Make sure that antifreeze concentration is
enough for the lowest temperature anticipated during
storage.
• Seal all external openings (i.e. engine exhaust outlet,
crankcase and hydraulic breather, fuel vent line, etc.)
with tape wide enough to cover the opening,
regardless of size.
NOTE: When sealing with tape, be sure to extend
tape approximately one inch (25 mm)
beyond opening to insure a good seal.

4-91
During Storage
• Once a month, start the engine and follow the
"Hydraulic Oil Warm-up" procedures listed in this
manual.
NOTE: Remove all seals from the machine (i.e.
crankcase and hydraulic breathers, engine
air intake, fuel tank vent lines, etc.).
Operate hydraulic functions for traveling, swing and
digging two or three times for lubrication after
"Hydraulic Oil Warm-up". Coat all the moving parts
and surfaces of the components with a new oil film
after operating. At the same time, charge the battery.
Rotate track to prevent track seizing. "
• Every 90 days, use a hydrometer to measure the
protection of the coolant. Refer to the antifreeze/
coolant protection chart to determine protection of the
cooling system. Add coolant as required.
After Storage
• When operating the work equipment, remove all
grease from the hydraulic cylinder rods.
• Add grease and oil at all lubrication points.
• Adjust fan and alternator belt tension.
• Connect the charged battery.
• Check condition of all hoses and connections.
• Check the levels of engine oil, fuel, coolant and
hydraulic circuit oil. If there is water in the oil, change
all the oil.
• Change all filter elements.
• When starting the engine after long-term storage,
follow the "Hydraulic Oil Warm-up" procedures listed
in this manual.

4-92
MAINTENANCE IN SPECIAL
CONDITIONS
NOTE: See “Operation Under Unusual Conditions” on
page 3-42 for other recommendations.
Conditions Maintenance Required

Operating in mud, water or rain. Perform a walk around inspection to check for any loose
fittings, obvious damage to the machine or any fluid leakage.
After completing operations, clean mud, rocks or debris from
the machine. Inspect for damage, cracked welds or loosened
parts.
Perform all daily lubrication and service.
If the operations were in salt water or other corrosive materials,
make sure to flush the affected equipment with fresh water.
Operating in an extremely dusty or hot Clean the air intake filters on a more frequent basis.
environment. Clean the radiator and oil cooler fins to remove embedded dirt
and dust.
Clean the fuel system intake strainer and fuel filter more
frequently.
Inspect and clean as required the starter and alternator.
Operating in rocky terrain. Check the undercarriage and track assemblies for damage or
excessive wear.
Inspect for loose or damaged fittings or bolts.
Relax track tension.
On a more frequent basis, inspect the front end attachments for
damage or excessive wear.
Install a top guard and front guard as required for protection
against falling rock.
Operating in extreme cold. Use the proper fuel for the temperature conditions.
Using a hydrometer, check the antifreeze to make sure that it is
providing the proper cold weather freeze protection.
Verify the condition of the batteries. In extremely cold weather
remove the batteries at night and store them in a warmer area.
Remove mud buildup as soon as possible to prevent it from
freezing to the undercarriage and causing damage.

4-93
4-94
OP001124
5Transportation
Obey all local, state or federal regulations for transportation of
excavator. If unsure of regulations check with local authorities.
Check intended route for road width, overhead clearances,
weight restrictions, and traffic control regulations. Special
approval or permits may be required.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

BEFORE AND AFTER
TRANSPORTATION
When necessary, machine should have counterweight and front
attachment removed for transport between locations. The tracks
should be retracted before removing counterweight and front
attachment.
If equipped, removable counterweight may also have to be
removed.
NOTE: Obey all local, state or federal regulations for
transportation of excavator. If unsure of regulations
check with local authorities.
Check intended route for road width, overhead
clearances, weight restrictions, and traffic control
regulations. Special approval or permits may be
required.
When doing this operation, make sure that it is done on solid
level ground, with adequate room for maneuvering all equipment
and keeping personnel at a safe distance when required.
WARNING
If engine must be run while performing maintenance, use
extreme care. Always have one person in cabin at all times.
Never leave cabin with engine running.
Personnel and Equipment

1. Disassembly and Reassembly: 3 persons
2. Crane Operator: 1 person
3. Crane Equipment: 1 machine
Transportation OP001124
5-1
Time Required
Work Procedures Time Required Equipment to be Used
Counterweight Disassembly 25 min Crane
Disassembly and Track Side Frame Disassembly 45 min Crane
Loading on
Carrier Front Disassembly 1 h 20 min Crane
Sub Total 2 h 30 min
Front Assembly 2h Crane
Track Side Frame Assembly 1h Crane
Reassembly
Counterweight Assembly 1h Crane
Sub Total 4h
Total Sum 6 h 30 min
5-2
Track Frame Extension and Retraction
CAUTION
Be sure to clean all off all dirt and mud from tread surface of
center frame, and on side frames; otherwise, it may cause
bolts to loosen.
Operate machine with side frames retracted only when
loading and unloading machine, or during driving for
loading and unloading.
Do not retract side frames for excavating or during normal
driving and operation. If machine is operated with either
side frame retracted, or even one side frame retracted,
during operation, cabin/machine will become unstable. This
can cause damage to, center frame, side frames, bolts, etc.
There are only six bolts holding side frame at each location
instead of nine.
Operation with side frame retracted could even result in a
tip over, serious injury and death.
Track Width Adjustment

The DX700LC has a variable track width device that allows
tracks to be retracted 300 mm on each side of machine.
The retraction device should only be used during transportation.
During machine operation at a work site, track width device
should be adjusted to have widest track width. If not, stability of
machine will be greatly reduced, which could result in fatal
accidents and damage.
Frame Retraction
1. Remove ten bolts, harden washers and spacers (1, Figure
157) from side frame (2) to be retracted.
2
NOTE: Do not loosen two bolts (3, Figure 157) on guide
(4).
NOTE: Repeat procedure at other center frame support
5
(5, Figure 157). 1
Reference
Description
Number
1 Bolt
2 Side Frame 4 3 FG016362
3 Bolt Figure 157

4 Guide
5 Center Frame Support
5-3
2. Turn superstructure so it is perpendicular to side frame to
be retracted. Raise side frame to approximately a 15°
angle from ground using a jack. Side frame should slide by
its own weight and hit against stop.
NOTE: If side frame does not slide in this condition, 90 ~ 110
allow side frame that is not contacting ground to
move back and forth slowly. See Figure 158.
15
CAUTION FG016363
Figure 158
The arm must be set at a 90 – 110° angle. Never set it
at an angle less than 90°
3. After side frame (1, Figure 159) has slid into place, lower
superstructure to ground. Install five spacers, harden
washers and bolts (2).
NOTE: Tighten bolts to 288 kg•m (2,083 ft lb).
1
NOTE: Repeat procedure at other center frame
support. 2
4. After bolts for one side frame are fastened, repeat Steps 1
thru 3 for other side frame.
5. Store remaining bolts, spacers and washers with machine. FG016364
Figure 159
Frame Extension
1. Remove five bolts, harden washers and spacers (1, Figure
2
160) from side frame (2) to be extended.
NOTE: Do not loosen two bolts (3, Figure 160) on guide
(4).
NOTE: Repeat procedure at other center frame support
5
(5, Figure 160).
Reference 1
Description
Number
1 Bolt
2 Side Frame 4 3 FG016365
3 Bolt Figure 160
4 Guide
5 Center Frame Support
5-4
2. Turn superstructure so it is perpendicular to side frame to
be extended.
NOTE: Do not attach cable on side frame step.
3. Attach one end of cable (1, Figure 161) (6 x 19 normal Z to
ø14 – ø16 A type) on arm (2) and other end on side frame 2
3
(3). Connect it with an appropriate holding device on both
ends.
1 4
4. Raise side frame (3, Figure 161) slightly with jack and
block (4). Extend arm (2) gradually to slide side frame out
until it hits stop. FG016366
Figure 161
5. After side frame (1, Figure 162) has slid into place, lower
superstructure to ground. Remove cable.
6. Install ten spacers, harden washers and bolts (2, Figure
162). 1
NOTE: Tighten bolts to 288 kg•m (2,083 ft lb).
NOTE: Repeat procedure at other track frame support. 2
7. After bolts for one side frame are fastened, repeat Steps
thru 6 for other side frame.
FG016368
Figure 162
5-5
LOADING AND UNLOADING
Warning for Counterweight and Front

Attachment Removal
DANGER
DOOSAN warns any user, that removal of counterweight
from machine, front attachment or any other part, may
affect stability of machine. This could cause unexpected
movement, resulting in death or serious injuries. DOOSAN
is not liable for any misuse.
Never remove counterweight or front attachment unless
upper structure is in-line with lower structure.
FG015763
Never rotate upper structure once counterweight or front
Figure 163
attachment has been removed.
WARNING
When transporting machine, know width, height, length and
weight.
Loading or unloading machine can be a dangerous
operation. Make sure to run engine at lowest speed setting,
and travel at slowest speed possible.
Make sure that ramp being used can handle weight of
machine. If required, add blocking under ramp for additional
support.
Make sure that ramp surface is free of grease or mud that
could cause machine to slip or slide.
Make sure that trailer is parked on firm, level ground before
attempting to load/unload excavator.
If it is required to turn machine while it is on trailer, make
sure to do this at slowest engine and travel speeds
possible.
Make sure to secure excavator onto trailer as required by
local transportation laws.
5-6
1. EU
Boom and
Model Arm Total Height Total Width Total Length Weight
Shoes
3.55 m 7.7 m (25' 3")
4,220 mm 3,410 mm 13,250 mm 70.1 metric tons
(11' 8") boom
(13' 10") (11' 2") (43' 6") (77.25 US tons)
arm 650 mm shoe
2.9 m 7.7 m (25' 3")
(9' 6") boom
(14' 10") (11' 12") (43' 12") (77.58 US tons)
arm 650 mm shoe
4.2 m 7.7 m (25' 3")
DX700LC (13' 9") boom
(16' 10") (11' 12") (42' 11") (77.25 US tons)
arm 650 mm shoe
2.9 m 6.65 m (21' 10")
(9' 6") boom
(16' 5") (11' 12") (40' 6") (76.92 US tons)
arm 650 mm shoe
2.6 m 6.65 m (21' 10")
(8' 6") boom
(15' 12") (11' 12") (40' 6") (77.14 US tons)
arm 650 mm shoe
2. North America
Boom and
Model Arm Total Height Total Width Total Length Weight
Shoes
3.55 m 7.7 m (25' 3")
(11' 8") boom
(13' 10") (11' 12") (43' 6") (79.23 US tons)
arm 900 mm shoe
2.9 m 7.7 m (25' 3")
(9' 6") boom
(14' 10") (11' 12") (43' 12") (79.56 US tons)
arm 900 mm shoe
4.2 m 7.7 m (25' 3")
DX700LC (13' 9") boom
(16' 10") (11' 12") (42' 11") (79.23 US tons)
arm 900 mm shoe
2.9 m 6.65 m (21' 10")
(9' 6") boom
(16' 5") (11' 12") (40' 6") (78.9 US tons)
arm 900 mm shoe
2.6 m 6.65 m (21' 10")
(8' 6") boom
(15' 12") (11' 12") (40' 6") (79.12 US tons)
arm 900 mm shoe
5-7
1. Make sure that trailer is parked on firm, level ground. See
Figure 164.
2. Make sure that ramps that are being used are designed to
handle weight of excavator. If required, add blocking under 90 ~ 110
ramp to provide additional support.
3. The ramp angle should be less than or not exceeding a 15°
angle. Ramps steeper than this may cause a problem
when loading or unloading.
15 FG015821
Figure 164
4. Set travel speed selector switch to "O" (OFF) position. See

Figure 165.
O
I
II
FG000023
Figure 165
5. Turn "OFF" auto idle selector button (1, Figure 166). The
indicator symbol will be disappeared. 1
6. Set engine speed to "LOW IDLE".
1 2
6 7
FG013833
Figure 166
7. If machine is equipped with work equipment, set work

equipment at front, and travel forward to load it.
90 ~ 110
15 FG015821
Figure 167
5-8
8. The unit does not require disassembly for normal
over-the-road transportation. If boom and arm need to be
removed, counterweight will place more weight on rear of
machine. Make sure to back excavator onto trailer so
counterweight end of excavator is positioned on ramp first.
See Figure 168.
15
FG016155
Figure 168
9. Extend bucket and arm cylinders to maximum length and

then lower boom slowly.
FG015822
Figure 169
Unlock
Lock
FG001091
Figure 170
11. Shut down engine by turning key to "O" (OFF) position

(Figure 171). O I
12. Remove key from starter switch.
FG000175
Figure 171
5-9
13. Make sure to secure excavator onto trailer before
transporting. Place blocking (1, Figure 172) in front of and
behind each track. Use chains or cable tie-downs (2) as
required by local transportation laws.
14. Refer to Dimensions for Transportation table and drawing
for overall machine height and width measurements. Make 1
1
sure to position excavator as shown. If not transported in
this position, height measurements may be different.
2
FG015857
Figure 172
LIFTING WITH SLING
WARNING
Improper lifting can allow load to shift and cause injury or
damage.
1. Refer to “Specification” on page 7-1 of this manual for

information on weight and dimensions.
2. Use properly rated cables and slings for lifting.
3. Position machine for a level lift.
4. Lifting cables should have a long enough length to prevent
contact with machine. Spreader bars may be required.
NOTE: If spreader bars are used, be sure that cables
are properly secured to them and that angle of Figure 173
cables is factored into lift strength.
5-10
OP000030
6Troubleshooting
Anytime that a malfunction occurs, take immediate corrective
action. Check for and investigate the cause of the malfunction. A
schedule maintenance program can prevent malfunctions from
occurring by doing preventative maintenance. A systematic
approach should be taken to troubleshooting, since several
overlapping malfunctions may give the appearance of a problem
that does not exist. If cause for the malfunction cannot be
determined, contact your DOOSAN distributor. Never perform
an adjustment of or disassembly of, hydraulic components,
electrical and electronic components, without first consulting a
DOOSAN distributor.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Problem Cause Remedy
Battery will not hold a Low battery power. Clean and retighten.
charge.
Alternator belt loose or bad. Tighten or replace belt.
Loose or corroded terminals. Tighten or replace as required.
Alternator faulty. Repair or replace as required.
Low battery power. Internal battery short. Replace battery.
Short circuit in wiring. Repair as required.
Engine speed is not Speed control dial failed. Replace control dial.
controllable.
Throttle controller failed. Replace controller.
Speed control motor failed. Repair or replace as required.
Blown fuse. Replace fuse.
Wiring harness damaged. Repair or replace as required.
Connector failed. Repair or replace as required.
Power mode selector does Blown fuse. Replace fuse.

not work.
Power mode selector switch failed. Replace switch.
Connector failed. Replace connector.
e-EPOS controller failed. Repair or replace as required.
Troubleshooting OP000030
6-1
Working mode selector does Blown fuse. Replace fuse.
not work.
Working mode selector switch. Replace switch failed.
Connector failed. Replace connector.
e-EPOS controller failed. Repair or replace as required.
ENGINE
Starter does not operate. Low battery power. Charge battery.
Poor terminal contact. Clean and tighten connections.
Starter switch failed. Replace switch.
Starter relay failed. Replace relay.
Starter controller failed. Replace controller.
Wiring harness faulty. Replace harness.
Battery relay failed. Replace relay.
Starter engages, engine Fuel gelled in cold weather. Replace fuel.

does not start.
Fuel filters plugged. Replace filters.
Water or dirt in fuel system. Clean system and add new fuel.
Air in fuel system. Purge air from system.
Engine stop control failed. Contact your DOOSAN dealer.
Engine stop relay failed. Replace relay.
Engine starts, runs only at Engine oil viscosity incorrect. Change oil.
low speed or shuts down.
Clogged or dirty fuel injectors. Clean injectors.
6-2
Engine knocks, runs Low engine oil. Refill.
unevenly or surges.
Plugged air intake system. Clean system and replace filter.
Injection pump out of adjustment. Contact your DOOSAN dealer.
Plugged fuel filter. Replace fuel filter.
Water or dirt in fuel system. Clean system and add new fuel.
Engine has poor power. Plugged air intake system. Clean system and replace filter.
Engine speed control cable out of Readjust.

adjustment.
Injection pump out of adjustment. Contact your DOOSAN dealer.
Valve backlash faulty. Adjust backlash.
Engine runs hot. Low coolant level. Add coolant.
Thermostat faulty. Replace thermostat.
Radiator cap faulty. Replace radiator cap.
Radiator core plugged. Clean radiator.
Oil cooler core plugged. Clean oil cooler.
Fan belt loose or damaged. Tighten or replace as required.
Temperature sensor faulty. Replace sensor.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
None of the controls Hydraulic pump failed. Contact your DOOSAN dealer.
function (loud noise from
pumps). Low hydraulic oil level. Add hydraulic oil as required.
Suction line plugged or damaged. Clean or replace as required.
None of the controls Pilot pump failure. Contact your DOOSAN dealer.
function (no noise from
pumps). Cut off solenoid valve failed. Replace solenoid.
Pilot cutoff switch is ON. Adjust pilot cutoff switch clearance.
6-3
All actuators have low Low hydraulic oil level. Add hydraulic oil as required.
power.
Suction filter clogged. Clean filter.
Hydraulic pumps faulty. Contact your DOOSAN dealer.
Main relief pressure too low. Contact your DOOSAN dealer.
Hydraulic pumps excavating. Bleed air from hydraulic pumps.
Only one or two actions Overload relief pressure too low. Reset pressure.
have little or no power.
Makeup check valve leaking. Clean or replace as required.
Control valve spool faulty. Replace valve spool.
Dirt in valve spool. Clean or replace as required.
Actuator failed. Repair or replace as required.
Cylinder seal failed. Repair or replace as required.
Cylinder rod damaged. Repair or replace as required.
Remote control valve failed. Replace control valve.
Wrong pilot line connection. Reconnect pilot lines.
Oil temperature too high. Oil cooler faulty. Contact your DOOSAN dealer.
Fan belt loose. Tighten fan belting as required.
SWING SYSTEM
No swinging motion. Swing brake valve faulty. Replace brake valve.
Hydraulic timer faulty. Replace timer.
Low brake release pressure. Adjust pressures.
Swing motor failed. Replace swing motor.
Remote control valve failed. Replace control valve.
Swing motion jerky. Swing gear worn. Replace swing gear.
Swing bearing damaged. Replace bearing.
Improper lubrication. Add grease.
6-4
TRAVEL SYSTEM
Travel motion does not Center joint leaking. Repair or replace as required.
function.
Parking brake will not release. Repair parking brake.
Travel motor failed. Repair or replace as required.
Remote control valve failed. Repair or replace as required.
Travel speed is too low. Track tension too high or too low. Adjust tension.
Damaged rollers or idlers. Repair or replace as required.
Track frame damaged. Repair as required.
Parking brake will not release. Repair parking brake.
6-5
6-6
OP001125
7Specification
1. EU
1) Specification
SPECIFICATION
COMPONENT
METRIC ENGLISH
Bucket CECE 2.9 m3 3.79 yd3
capacity
PCSA 3.3 m3 4.32 yd3
Equipment weight 70.4 metric tons 77.5 U.S. tons
Engine Model ISUZU AH-6WGIX
Type Water cooled - 6 cylinders
Rated output 345 kw @1,800 rpm 463 hp @1,800 rpm
Maximum torque 202 kg•m @ 1,300 rpm 1,461 ft lb @ 1,300 rpm
Fuel tank capacity 900 liters 237.8 U.S. gal.
Hydraulic Type Tendem, Axial piston
pump Discharging pressure 350 kg/cm2 5,000 psi
Maximum discharge quantity 2 x 436 liters/min 2 x 115.2 U.S. gpm
Hydraulic oil Tank Level 350 liters 92.5 U.S. gal.
capacity System 790 liters 208.7 U.S. gal.
Performance Digging 1) Bucket 35.7/34.8 metric tons 39.3/38.3 tons
capability Arm 29.3/33.5 metric tons 32.3/36.9 tons
Swing speed 7.1 rpm
Travel speed High speed 4.6 km/h 2.86 MPH
Low speed 2.8 km/h 1.74 MPH
Traction force High speed 42.4 metric tons 46.7 tons
Low speed 48.9 metric tons 53.9 tons
Gradeability 35° (70% slope)
Ground pressure 1.02 kg/cm2 14.5 psi
Ground clearance 870 mm 34.25 in
Track shoe width 650 mm 25.6 in
Upper roller qty. 3 per side
Bottom roller qty. 8 per side
NOTE: 1) 3.55 m (11' 8") Arm / 2.9 m (9' 6") Arm
Specification OP001125
7-1
2) Overall Dimensions
H
A
I
B
J
N
G
F
M
E
P
O
K C
L D
FG015838
Figure 1
Boom Type (One Piece) 7.7 m (25' 3") 6.65 m (21' 10")
3.55 m 2.9 m 4.2 m 2.9 m 2.6 m
Arm Type
(11' 8") (9' 6") (13' 9") (9' 6") (8' 6")
Bucket Type (SAE) 3.3 m3 3.3 m3 3.0 m3 3.9 m3 4.5 m3
13,250 mm 13,400 mm 13,085 mm 12,335 mm
Shipping Length A
(43' 6") (43' 12") (42' 11") (40' 6")
Tail Swing Radius B 4,090 mm (13' 5")
Tumbler Distance C 4,730 mm (15' 6")
Track Length D 5,975 mm (19' 7")
C/Weight Clearance E 1,525 mm (5' 0")
4,063 mm 4,418 mm 5,015 mm 4,920 mm 4,750 mm
Shipping Height (Boom) F
(13' 4") (14' 6") (16' 5") (16' 2") (15' 7")
4,220 mm 4,520 mm 5,130 mm 5,000 mm 4,870 mm
Shipping Height (Hose) G
(13' 10") (14' 10") (16' 10") (16' 5") (15' 12")
Shipping Width (Std.) H 3,410 mm (11' 2")
House Width I 3,410 mm (11' 2")
Cab. Width J 1,010 mm (3' 4")
Shoe Width K 650 mm (2' 2")
Undercarriage Width (Std.) L 3,400 mm (11' 2")/4,000 mm (13' 1")*
Height Over Cab. M 3,515 mm (11' 6")
Cab. Height Above House N 208 mm (8")
Car Body Clearance O 870 mm (2' 10")
Track Height P 1,413 mm (4' 8")
NOTE: * Retracted/Extended.
7-2
7-3
2. North America
1) Specification
SPECIFICATION
COMPONENT
METRIC ENGLISH
Bucket CECE 2.9 m3 3.79 yd3
capacity
PCSA 3.3 m3 4.32 yd3
Equipment weight 71.9 metric tons 79.2 tons
Engine Model ISUZU AH-6WGIX
Type Water cooled - 6 cylinders
Rated output 345 kw @1,800 rpm 463 hp @1,800 rpm
Maximum torque 202 kg•m @ 1,300 rpm 1,461 ft lb @ 1,300 rpm
Fuel tank capacity 900 liters 237.8 U.S. gal.
Hydraulic Type Tendem, Axial piston
pump Discharging pressure 350 kg/cm2 5,000 psi
Maximum discharge quantity 2 x 436 liters/min 2 x 115.2 U.S. gpm
Hydraulic oil Tank Level 350 liters 92.5 U.S. gal.
capacity System 790 liters 208.7 U.S. gal.
Performance Digging 1) Bucket 35.7 metric tons 39.3 tons
capability Arm 29.3 metric tons 32.3 tons
Swing speed 7.1 rpm
Travel speed High speed 4.6 km/h 2.86 MPH
Low speed 2.8 km/h 1.74 MPH
Traction force High speed 42.4 metric tons 46.7 tons
Low speed 48.9 metric tons 53.9 tons
Gradeability 35° (70% slope)
Ground pressure 0.76 kg/cm2 10.8 psi
Ground clearance 870 mm 34.25 in
Track shoe width 900 mm 35.43 in
Upper roller qty. 3 per side
Bottom roller qty. 8 per side
7-4
2) Overall Dimensions
H
A
I
B
J
N
G
F
M
E
P
O
K C
L D
FG015838
Figure 2
3.55 m 2.9 m 4.2 m 2.9 m 2.6 m
Arm Type
(11' 8") (9' 6") (13' 9") (9' 6") (8' 6")
13,250 mm 13,400 mm 13,085 mm 12,335 mm
Shipping Length A
(43' 6") (43' 12") (42' 11") (40' 6")
Tail Swing Radius B 4,090 mm (13' 5")
Tumbler Distance C 4,730 mm (15' 6")
Track Length D 5,975 mm (19' 7")
C/Weight Clearance E 1,525 mm (5' 0")
4,063 mm 4,418 mm 5,015 mm 4,920 mm 4,750 mm
Shipping Height (Boom) F
(13' 4") (14' 6") (16' 5") (16' 2") (15' 7")
4,220 mm 4,520 mm 5,130 mm 5,000 mm 4,870 mm
Shipping Height (Hose) G
(13' 10") (14' 10") (16' 10") (16' 5") (15' 12")
Shipping Width (Std.) H 3,410 mm (11' 2")
House Width I 3,410 mm (11' 2")
Cab. Width J 1,010 mm (3' 4")
Shoe Width K 900 mm (2' 11")
Undercarriage Width (Std.) L 3,650 mm (11' 12")/4,250 mm (13' 11")*
Height Over Cab. M 3,515 mm (11' 6")
Cab. Height Above House N 208 mm (8")
Car Body Clearance O 870 mm (2' 10")
Track Height P 1,413 mm (4' 8")
NOTE: * Retracted/Extended.
7-5
Working Range
M
K
I
G
Ground
J
L
D 8'
B
A
FG015858
Figure 3
7-6
3.55 m 2.9 m 4.2 m 2.9 m 2.6 m
Arm Type
(11' 8") (9' 6") (13' 9") (9' 6") (8' 6")
13,250 mm 12,720 mm 13,865 mm 11,605 mm 11,345 mm
Max. Digging Reach A
(43' 6") (41' 9") (45' 6") (38' 1") (37' 3")
12,990 mm 12,450 mm 13,610 mm 11,305 mm 11,040 mm
Max. Digging Reach (Ground) B
(42' 7") (40' 10") (44' 8") (37' 1") (36' 3")
10,230 mm 10,790 mm 10,360 mm 9,860 mm 9,655 mm
Max. Radius Vertical C
(33' 7") (35' 5") (33' 12") (32' 35") (31' 8")
4,540 mm 4,530 mm 10,360 mm 3,800 mm 3,785 mm
Min. Radius 8' Line D
(14' 11") (14' 10") (33' 12") (12' 6") (12' 5")
2,350 mm 3,060 mm 170 mm 1,835 mm 2,050 mm
Min. Digging Reach E
(7' 9") (10' 0") (7") (6' 0") (6' 9")
5,780 mm 5,790 mm 5,810 mm 5,230 mm 5,195 mm
Min. Swing Radius F
(18' 12") (18' 12") (19' 1") (17' 2") (17' 1")
3,248 mm 3,950 mm 2,630 mm 3,080 mm 3,380 mm
Min. Loading Height G
(10' 8") (12' 12") (8' 8") (10' 1") (11' 1")
5,730 mm 4,060 mm 6,515 mm 3,450 mm 3,305 mm
Max. Vertical Wall Depth H
(18' 10") (13' 4") (21' 4") (11' 4") (10' 10")
8,320 mm 8,220 mm 8,660 mm 7,020 mm 6,940 mm
Max. Loading Height I
(27' 4") (26' 12") (28' 5") (23' 0") (22' 9")
8,270 mm 7,550 mm 8,910 mm 6,925 mm 6,620 mm
Max. Depth To 8' Line J
(27' 2") (24' 9") (29' 3") (22' 9") (21' 9")
10,470 mm 10,380 mm 10,795 mm 9,210 mm 9,135 mm
Max. Bucket Pin Height K
(34' 4") (34' 1") (35' 5") (30' 3") (29' 12")
8,410 mm 7,730 mm 9,030 mm 7,075 mm 6,780 mm
Max. Digging Depth L
(27' 7") (25' 4") (29' 8") (23' 3") (22' 3")
12,165 mm 12,040 mm 12,520 mm 10,740 mm 10,680 mm
Max. Digging Height M
(39' 11") (39' 6") (41' 1") (35' 3") (35' 0")
Bucket Angle d 179.4 deg 177.8 deg 179.4 deg 167.4 deg 166.4 deg
7-7
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT OF
WORKLOAD MATERIALS
IMPORTANT
Weights are approximations of estimated average volume
and mass. Exposure to rain, snow or ground water; settling
or compaction due to overhead weight and chemical or
industrial processing or changes due to thermal or
chemical transformations could all increase value of
weights listed in table.
LOW WEIGHT OR MEDIUM WEIGHT OR HIGH WEIGHT OR

DENSITY DENSITY DENSITY
MATERIAL 1,100 KG/M3 1,600 KG/M3 2,000 KG/M3
(1,850 LB/YD3), OR (2,700 LB/YD3), OR (3,370 LB/YD3), OR
LESS LESS LESS
401 kg/m3
Charcoal --------------------- ---------------------
(695 lb/yd3)
433 kg/m3
Coke, blast furnace size --------------------- ---------------------
(729 lb/yd3)
449 kg/m3
Coke, foundry size --------------------- ---------------------
(756 lb/yd3)
801 kg/m3
Coal, bituminous slack, piled --------------------- ---------------------
(1,350 lb/yd3)
881 kg/m3
Coal, bituminous r. of m., piled --------------------- ---------------------
(1,485 lb/yd3)
897 kg/m3
Coal, anthracite --------------------- ---------------------
(1,512 lb/yd3)
1,009 kg/m3
Clay, DRY, in broken lumps --------------------- ---------------------
(1,701 lb/yd3)
1,746 kg/m3
Clay, DAMP, natural bed --------------------- ---------------------
(2,943 lb/yd3)
1,506 kg/m3
Cement, Portland, DRY granular --------------------- ---------------------
(2,583 lb/yd3)
1,362 kg/m3
Cement, Portland, DRY clinkers --------------------- ---------------------
(2,295 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Dolomite, crushed --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
1,202 kg/m3
Earth, loamy, DRY, loose --------------------- ---------------------
(2,025 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Earth, DRY, packed --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
1,762 kg/m3
Earth, WET, muddy --------------------- ---------------------
(2,970 lb/yd3)
7-8
LOW WEIGHT OR MEDIUM WEIGHT OR HIGH WEIGHT OR
DENSITY DENSITY DENSITY
MATERIAL 1,100 KG/M3 1,600 KG/M3 2,000 KG/M3
(1,850 LB/YD3), OR (2,700 LB/YD3), OR (3,370 LB/YD3), OR
LESS LESS LESS
961 kg/m3
Gypsum, calcined, (heated, powder) --------------------- ---------------------
(1,620 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Gypsum, crushed to 3 inch size --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
1,810 kg/m3
Gravel, DRY, packed fragments --------------------- ---------------------
(3,051 lb/yd3)
1,922 kg/m3
Gravel, WET, packed fragments --------------------- ---------------------
(3,240 lb/yd3)
1,282 kg/m3
Limestone, graded above 2 --------------------- ---------------------
(2,160 lb/yd3)
Limestone, graded 1,362 kg/m3
--------------------- ---------------------
1-1/2 or 2 (2,295 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Limestone, crushed --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
1,602 kg/m3
Limestone, fine --------------------- ---------------------
(2,705 lb/yd3)
1,282 kg/m3
Phosphate, rock --------------------- ---------------------
(2,160 lb/yd3)
929 kg/m3
Salt --------------------- ---------------------
(1,566 lb/yd3)
529 kg/m3
Snow, light density --------------------- ---------------------
(891 lb/yd3)
1,522 kg/m3
Sand, DRY, loose --------------------- ---------------------
(2,565 lb/yd3)
1,922 kg/m3
Sand, WET, packed --------------------- ---------------------
(3,240 lb/yd3)
1,362 kg/m3
Shale, broken --------------------- ---------------------
(2,295 lb/yd3)
529 kg/m3
Sulphur, broken --------------------- ---------------------
(1,620 lb/yd3)
7-9
7-10
1INDEX
Numerics Tooth 4-71
1,000 Hour / 6 Month Service 4-43
10 Hour / Daily Service 4-14 C
12,000 Hour / 6 Year Service 4-56 Cabin Light 2-56
2,000 Hour / Yearly Service 4-49 Cabin Storage Compartments 2-66
250 Hour / Monthly Service 4-28 Cabin Work Light Switch 2-12
4,000 Hour / Biennial Service 4-55 Ceiling Cover 2-62
50 Hour / Weekly Service 4-25 Charge Warning Light 2-24
500 Hour / 3 Month Service 4-34 Check and Confirmation After Stopping Engine
3-13
A Cigarette Lighter 2-14
Abnormal State Warning Symbols 2-29 Circuit Breaker 2-56
Adjust Valve Clearance 4-54 Clock 2-23, 2-38
Air Intake System 4-23 Cold Weather Hydraulic System Warm-up 3-10
Outer Element of Air Cleaner 4-39 Cold Weather Starting 3-6
Replace Outer Air Cleaner Element 4-50 Communication
Alternator and Starter 4-54 Error Warning 2-28
Antifreeze Concentration Tables 4-82 Indicator 2-27
Antivibration Shock Mounts 4-54 Component Locations 2-2
Arm and Bucket Joint Pins 4-25 Constant Speed Button 2-13
Ashtray 2-66 Coolant Temperature Warning Light 2-25
Audio Control Panel 2-10 Cooling System
Auto Idle Mode 3-20 Clean Radiator, Oil Cooler and Air Conditioner
Auto Idle Selection 2-47 Condenser Coil 4-38
Auto Idle Selector Button 2-34 Engine 4-78
Auxiliary Mode Switch 2-9 Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
2-25
Oil Cooler Dust Net 4-20
B
Radiator Coolant 4-51
Batteries 4-33
Refill Cooling System 4-21
Battery 4-74
Counterweight and Front Attachment Removal 5-6
Box Door 2-69
Cracks and Faulty Welds 4-23
Electrolyte Level 4-75
Cup Holder 2-68
Terminals 4-75
Cycle Time Tests 4-54
Voltage 2-28
Bolt and Nut Inspection 4-58
Boom and Arm Joint Pins 4-28 D
Boost Mode 3-21 Description of Lubrication and Service Chart 4-10
Booster Button 2-17 Digital Clock 2-23
Booster Cable 3-7 Display Selection 2-37
Breaker Selection 2-47 Display Selector Button 2-36
Bucket 4-71 Door Side Latch 2-65
Installation 4-73 Door Window Holder 2-68
O-ring 4-72 Down Arrow Button 2-36
Shimming Procedures 4-73
Shimming Procedures for Installed Bucket 4-73 E
Teeth and Side Cutters 4-22 Economy Mode Selection 2-46
Index 950106-00012E
8-1
Electrical System 4-74, 6-1 G
Engine 6-2 Gauges
Adjust Valve Clearance 4-54 Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge 2-22
Check and Adjust Engine 4-48 Fuel Gauge 2-22
Check Warning Light 2-25 Hour Meter 2-24
Coolant Temperature Gauge 2-22 Hydraulic Oil Temperature 2-23
Coolant Temperature Warning Light 2-25 Multifunction Gauge 2-23, 2-27
Cover 2-69 General Venting 4-89
Emergency Stop Switch 2-9
Fan Belt 4-30, 4-31
H
Head Bolt Torques 4-54
Handling a New Excavator 3-1
Oil and Filter 4-27, 4-35
Handling of Accumulator 4-85
Oil Level 4-14
Hanger 2-67, 2-68
Oil Pressure Warning Light 2-24
Head Bolt Torques 4-54
Shutdown 3-12
Headlight Switch 2-11
Speed 2-28
Heater and Air Conditioner 2-49
Speed Control Dial 2-8
Additional Operating Instruction 2-54
Start 3-4
Control Panel 2-13, 2-50
Start and Stop 3-2
Filter 4-36, 4-47
ESC Button 2-37
Location of Controls and Vents 2-49
Excavator Rated Lift Capacity Tables 1-48
Memory Function of Used Mode 2-54
Extension and Retraction of Track Frames 5-3
Refrigerant 4-48
System 4-57
F Horn Button 2-16
Fan Belt 4-27 Hose Clamps 4-33
Filter / Oil Info 2-39 Hour Meter 2-24
Filter State 2-29 Hydraulic System 6-3
Flow Control 2-44 Flow Control 2-44
Flow Control Button 2-34 Front Hydraulic Pump Pressure 2-29
Frame General Venting 4-89
Extension 5-4 Hydraulic Breaker 3-32
Retraction 5-3 Hydraulic Hoses and Tubing 3-32
Front Oil and Filter 3-36
Bottom Window 2-64 Operation 3-33
End Attachments 4-33 Selection 3-32
Hydraulic Pump Pressure 2-29 Hydraulic Cylinders 4-88
Upper Windows 2-63 Hydraulic Oil Exchange 4-52
Windows 2-63 Hydraulic Oil Return Filter 4-33, 4-44
Fuel Hydraulic Oil Tank 4-15
Filter 4-42 Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge 2-23
Gauge 2-22 Leaks in the Hydraulic System 4-16
Heater Switch 2-16 Main System Pump 4-88
Level 4-17 Oil Exchange 4-52
System 4-42 Rear Hydraulic Pump Pressure 2-29
Transfer Pump 4-83 Swing Motor 4-89
Tank Drain Valve 4-27 Warm-up 3-9
Transfer Pump 4-83
Fuse
I
Boxes 2-57, 4-76
Indicator
Fuses 4-76
Communication Indicator 2-27
Fusible Link 2-57
Indicator Lights
Identification 4-77
Charge Warning Light 2-24
Coolant Temperature Warning Light 2-25
Engine Check Warning 2-25
Index 950106-00012E
8-2
Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light 2-24 Extreme Heat 3-43
Preheating Indicator Light 2-26 High Altitudes 3-45
Work Light 2-26 Rainy or Humid Conditions 3-44
Inspecting Engine Before Starting 3-2 Salt Water Areas 3-44
Inspection, Maintenance and Adjustment 4-1 Operation of All Switches 4-23
Instrument Panel 2-18, 2-20 Operation Selection Display 2-46
Intermittent Speed Button 2-14 Operation Under Unusual Conditions 3-42
Operational Checks Before Starting Engine 3-3
L Operational Controls and Panels 2-6
Language 2-38 Operator's Area 2-4
Leaks in the Fuel System 4-18 Operator's Compartment Light 2-56
Leaks in the Hydraulic System 4-16 Outer Air Cleaner Element 4-50
Levers Outer Element of Air Cleaner 4-39
Adjusting Reclining 2-59 Overall Dimensions 7-2
Adjusting the Seat Forward 2-58 Overload Warning Switch (Optional) 2-15
Adjusting the Seat's Angle 2-58
Angle Adjustment of Armrest 2-59 P
Safety Lever 2-18 Panels
Lifting 3-40 Air Conditioner Control Panel 2-13
Lifting With Sling 5-10 Audio Control 2-10
Lights Heater and Air Conditioner 2-49
Cabin 2-56 Heater and Air Conditioner Control Panel 2-50
Loading and Unloading 5-6 Instrument 2-18
Locations of Safety Labels 1-4 Instrument Panel 2-20
Long Term Storage 4-90 Wiper Switch 2-13
Lubrication and filters 3-2 Parking Excavator 3-30
Lubrication and Service Chart 4-8 Password
Activated 2-21
M Set Password 2-42
Magnetic Clutch 4-57 Password Activated 2-21
Main Menu 2-35 Photo Sensor 2-18
Maintenance in Special Conditions 4-92 Pilot Cutoff Switch 2-56
Maintenance Intervals 4-12 Pilot Filter 4-33, 4-45
Miscellaneous Access Doors 2-69 Pins and Bushings 4-33
Mode Selection 3-19 Power Boost Selection 2-47
Mode Selector Buttons 2-33 Power Mode 3-19
Multifunction Gauge 2-23, 2-27 Power Mode Selection 2-46
Power Mode Selector Button 2-33
Power Socket 2-15
N Preheating Light 2-26
Nuts and Bolts 4-33 Preliminary Work Machine Setup for Maintenance
4-4
O Preventive Maintenance 4-1
Oil Cooler Dust Net 4-20 Pump Pressure
Oil Level of Travel Reducer 4-32 Front Pump 2-29
Opening the Window 2-63 Rear Pump 2-29
Operating
Controls 2-1 Q
Instructions 3-19 Quick Clamp Operation Selection 2-48
Precautions 3-25 Quick Clamp Switch (Optional) 2-9
Techniques 3-40
Operation 3-1
Operation In R
Extreme Cold 3-42 Radiator Coolant 4-51
Rear Hydraulic Pump Pressure 2-29
Index 950106-00012E
8-3
Refill Cooling System 4-21 Stereo 2-55
Rotating Buttons 2-17 Audio Control Panel 2-10
Rotating Pedal Valve (Optional) 3-39 Structural Damage 4-54
Suction Strainer 4-52
S Sun Visor 2-67
Safety 1-1 Swing
Safety Lever 2-18, 3-13 Bearing 4-26
Safety Precautions 4-3 Gear and Pinion 4-34
Seat 2-58 Motor 4-89
Seat Adjustment Reduction Device 4-19, 4-33, 4-43, 4-49
Adjusting Reclining 2-59 System 6-4
Adjusting the Seat Forward 2-58 Switches
Adjusting the Seat's Angle 2-58 Auto Idle Selector Button 2-34
Adjustment of Lumbar Support 2-59 Automatic Travel Speed Control 3-14
Air Suspension Seat 2-61 Auxiliary Mode 2-9
Angle Adjustment of Armrest 2-59 Booster Button 2-17
Headrest 2-59 Cabin Work Light Switch 2-12
Left ad Right Control Stand Location 2-61 Cigar Lighter 2-14
Left and Right Control Stand Elevation Height Constant Speed Button 2-13
2-61 Display Selector Button 2-36
Seat Belt 2-60, 4-23 Down Arrow Button 2-36
Seat Warmer Switch (Optional) 2-16 Economy Mode Selector Button 2-33
Selection Button 2-36 Engine Emergency Stop 2-9
Selection of Engine Speed Control 3-19
Breaker 2-46, 2-47 Engine Speed Control Dial 2-8
Overload Alarm 2-47 ESC Button 2-37
Power Boost Selection 2-46, 2-47 Flow Control Button 2-34
Quick Clamp Operation 2-48 Fuel Heater 2-16
Shear 2-46, 2-47 Headlight Switch 2-11
Serial Numbers 4-3 Home Button 2-36
Set Password 2-42 Horn Button 2-16
Setting Clock 2-38 Intermittent Speed Button 2-14
Shear Buttons 2-17 Overload Warning (Optional) 2-15
Shear Pedal Valve (Optional) 3-38 Pilot Cutoff Switch 2-56
Shear Selection 2-47 Power Mode Selector Button 2-33
Shimming Procedures for Installed Bucket 4-73 Power Socket 2-15
Shutdown Quick Clamp (Optional) 2-9
Check and Confirmation After Stopping Engine Rotating Buttons 2-17
3-13 Seat Warmer (Optional) 2-16
Engine Shutdown 3-12 Selection Button 2-36
Parking Excavator 3-30 Shear Buttons 2-17
Side Door 2-69 Starter Switch 2-8
Specification 7-1 Travel Speed Selector Switch 2-11
Standard Mode Selection 2-46 Travel/Swing Alarm (Optional) 2-15
Starter Switch 2-8 Up Arrow Button 2-35
Starting Engine Using a Booster Battery 3-7 Warning Light 2-12
Start-up Washer Button 2-14
Cold Weather Hydraulic System Warm-up 3-10 Wiper Switch (Lower) 2-13
Cold Weather Starting 3-6 Symbols
Engine Start 3-4 Air Cleaner Clogged Warning 2-31
Hydraulic System Warm-up 3-9 Hydraulic Oil Overheat Warning 2-30
Inspection Before Starting Engine 3-2 Overload Warning (Optional) 2-32
Operational Checks Before Starting Engine 3-3 Pilot Filter Clogged Warning 2-30
Starting Engine Using a Booster Battery 3-7 Return Filter Clogged Warning 2-31
Index 950106-00012E
8-4
T V
Table of Recommended Lubricants 4-6 Venting and Priming Hydraulic System 4-88
Towing Procedure 3-31 General Venting 4-89
Track Assemblies 4-27 Hydraulic Cylinders 4-88
Track Tension 4-86 Main System Pump 4-88
Tracks Swing Motor 4-89
Extension and Retraction 5-3
Extension and Retraction of Track Frames 5-3 W
Frame Extension 5-4 Warning Light Switch 2-12
Frame Retraction 5-3 Washer Button 2-14
Transportation 5-1 Water Separator 4-18
Travel 3-14 Weight of Workload Materials 7-6
Control Lever Operation 3-15 Window Washer Liquid 4-21
Instructions 3-16 Windows
Reduction Device 4-32, 4-33, 4-46 Door Window Holder 2-68
Speed Selector Switch 2-11 Front 2-63
System 6-5 Front Bottom 2-64
Travel/Swing Alarm Switch (Optional) 2-15 Front Upper 2-63
Trenching Mode Selector Button 2-33 Opening 2-63
Troubleshooting 6-1 Sun Visor 2-67
Wiper Switch (Lower) 2-13
U Wiper Switch Panel 2-13
Unloading and Loading 5-6 Work Levers (Joysticks) (ISO Style) 3-22
Up Arrow Button 2-35 Work Light Indicator Light 2-26
Working Range 7-4
Index 950106-00012E
8-5
Index 950106-00012E
8-6

DX 700 Doosan

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DX 700 Doosan

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DX 700 Doosan

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main sections covered in the manual?

What are the main sections covered in the manual?

What safety precautions should be followed before starting the engine?

What safety precautions should be followed before starting the engine?

DX700LC

Operation and Maintenance Manual

950106-00012E Operation and Maintenance Manual Copyright Doosan 2010

Operating Controls ....................................................................2-1

Table of Contents 950106-00012E

Inspection, Maintenance and Adjustment...............................4-1

Table of Contents 950106-00012E

Table of Contents 950106-00012E

Table of Contents 950106-00012E

Please respect the importance of taking responsibility for your

SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL

Safety precautions are described in SAFETY from page 1-4 on.

AVOID DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. - READ AND UNDERSTAND

Never get in under the machine while it is being jacked up

2. Warnings for High Voltage (190-00689,

When raising window,

Falling window can cause

4. Warnings for a High-pressure Cylinder

6. Warnings for Leaving Operator's Seat

Sudden and unwanted machine

Always make sure when leaving

Battery fumes can explode. Keep sparks and flames away

8. Warnings for High Temperature

HOT OIL CAN CAUSE INJURY OR

To prevent hot oil from spurting out:

HOT COOLANT CAN CAUSE INJURY

10. Warnings for Handling an Accumulator

Keep away from flame.

Rotating par ts can cause

12. Warning Tag - Used When Inspection

14. Caution for Hood (190-00522A)

15. Keep Out of the Swing Area

17. Warning for Engine ECU (K1012583)

19. Warning for Tie Down (950209-00205)

To lift safely while in Digging Mode, the following items must be

Always engage the "Digging Mode" control on the Instrument

Clothing and Personal Protective Items

Vibration Level Information

Recommendations for Limiting Vibrations

Mounting and Dismounting

Precautions When Handling Fluids at High

Injury from Work Equipment

Fire Extinguisher and First Aid Kit

Protection from Falling or Flying Objects

Never attempt to alter or modify any type of protective structure

Work Site Precautions

Minimum levels of insurance coverage, work permits or

When Swinging or Changing Direction of

Never travel over obstacles or slopes that will cause the

When traveling on rough ground, travel at low speed, and avoid

When using the machine, to prevent accidents caused by

Avoid High Voltage Cables

Voltage Minimum Safe Distance

Use these minimum distances as a guideline only. Depending

In a work site where falling rocks can cause damage and